The URL can be used to link to this page

FD 93 Bunk Room Renovation ProjectⅥLLAGE OF OAK BR00K CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROJECT ⅥLLAGE OF OAK BR00K CONTRACT FOR FIRE STAT10N 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Paee ARTICLE I: THE WORI( ............1 1.1 Performance of the Work ...................1 1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates ...............2 1.3 Required Submittals .........2 A. Submittals Required .........2 B. Number and Format ..........2 C. Time of Submission and Owner's Review. ..........2 D. Responsibility for De1ay........ .............3 1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisions .................3 1.5 Conditions at the Work Site; Record Drawings .....................3 1.6 Technical Ability to Perform ..............4 1.7 Financial Abilityto Perform ...............4 1.8 Time......... .......4 1.9 Safety at the Work Site........... ............4 1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs... ....... 5 l.l1 Damage to the Work, the Work Site, and Other: Property.... ....................5 1.12 Subcontractors and Suppliers .............5 A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers............. ....................5 B. Removal of Subcontractors and Suppliers ...........6 1.13 Simultaneous Work By Others. ..........6 1.14 Occupancy Prior to Final Payrnent............ ...........6 1.15 owner's Right to Terminate or suspend work for convenience..............................6 A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience........ .................6 B. Payment for Completed Work... .........6 ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS. ......................7 2.1 Changes ..........7 2.2 Delays .............7 A. Extensions for Unavoidable Delays ............. ........7 B. No Compensation for Delays .............7 ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR,S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEFECTTVE WORI(...... 7 3.1 Inspection; Testing; Correction of Defects. ..........7 A. lnspection .......7 B. Re-Inspection.............. ........................7 C. Correction .......8 3.2 Warranty of Work.... .........8 A. Scope of Warranty............... ...............8 B. Repairs; Extension of Warranty............... ............8 C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties.............. ....................8 3.3 Owner's Right to Correct ...................8 ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES.......... ........8 4.1 Bonds....... .......8 4.2 Insurance.. .......9 4.3 Indemnification.......... .......9 ARTICLE V: PAYMENT......... ......................9 5.1 Contract Price ......... ..........9 5.2 Taxes and Benefits.............. ...............9 5.3 Progress Payments.. ..........9 A. Payment in Installments .......... ...........9 B. Pay Requests.............. .....10 C. Work Entire ....................l0 5.4 Final Acceptance and Final Payment............ .....10 A. Notice of Completion............ ...........10 B. Punch List and Final Acceptance........ ...............10 C. Final Payment............. ......................10 5.5 Liens ............. 11 A. Tit1e.......... ..... l l B. Waivers of Lien ..............11 C. Rernoval of Liens ...........11 D. Protection of Owner On1y......... .......1I 5。6 Deductions.………….・ ¨¨¨¨―¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨“¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨・・・・¨………¨・・・・¨¨¨¨¨・・¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨・11 A.Owner's Riま tto Withhdd.………………………………………………………。11 B. Use ofWithheld Fllnds..¨.¨・・・・¨¨・¨・¨・・・・・¨¨¨¨・・………………………・・¨“・¨¨¨・¨¨……………・¨“¨12 ARTICLE VI:DISPUTES AND REMEDIES。……………………………………………………………12 6.l E)ispute Resolution Procedure.¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨“¨“¨・・………………¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨……………。12 A.Notice ofDisputes and OttectiOns.………………………………………………-12 Bo Negotittion ofDisputes and OttectiOns.……………………………………………12 6.2 Contractor's Relnedies。……………¨¨¨¨¨…………¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨“¨¨¨“……………¨¨¨¨…………・12 6。3 C)wner's Rcllledies.¨¨¨..¨・・¨¨・・¨¨¨¨¨・・¨¨¨¨¨………¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨………………¨……………………¨¨・13 6.4 0wner's Additional Rernedy for Delay......・・・・・…・・・・…・・・・・・・・・・・・…・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・…・・・・・・・・14 6。5 Terlninations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience。¨¨¨¨¨¨¨………………………………14 ARTICLE VII:LEGAL RELATIONSHIPS AND REQUIREMENTS.………………………14 7.l Binding Effect。……………………・…¨・…………・………………………………・……・……・………………14 7.2 Relationship ofthe Parties.……………………………………………………………………………14 7.3 No Collusion/Prohibited lnterests.¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨……¨““¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨“・15 7.4 Assigコ田nent.¨¨¨¨・・¨“¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨・・¨¨¨¨¨¨“¨¨………¨…・・¨“¨¨¨¨¨………………15 7.5 Confldential lhfollllatiOn.¨¨¨¨¨¨¨・・¨¨¨¨¨¨¨………¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨・・…………・・¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨。15 7.6 No Waiver.……………………………………………・……・………………………………………………15 7.7 No Third Party Beneflcianes.¨¨¨¨¨.・ ¨¨¨¨¨¨“・・・・¨¨¨¨¨…………¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨・・¨¨¨¨。16 7.8 Notices.¨¨¨¨¨¨¨.・ ¨¨¨¨・・¨“¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨・。“¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨………………………………¨¨¨¨¨¨。16 7.9 Goverrung Laws.………………¨………¨・・……………………………………………………・・…¨¨¨………16 7.10 Changesin Laws。…………………………………………………………………………………………17 7.1l Compliance with Laws.……¨¨¨……………¨……………………………………¨¨…¨¨¨¨¨¨………¨¨¨。17 A.Compliance Required.…………………………………………………………………………………・17 B. Liability for Fines,Penalties.¨¨¨¨…………¨“………・・¨¨¨¨¨¨………………………・・¨¨¨¨¨…………¨¨…17 C.Prevailing Wage Act。……………………………………………………………………………………17 Do Required Provisions Deemed hserted.¨“““¨………¨¨¨¨“¨“¨¨¨¨¨¨¨“・・……¨¨¨¨¨¨¨…18 7.12 Compliance with Patents.……………………¨……………………………………………………………………。18 A. Assumption ofCosts,Royalties,and Fees.……………………¨¨・・…“………………¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨…18 B. Effect ofContractor Bcing Ettoined.…¨“¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨…………………………¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨…18 7.13 Tinlc.…………………………………………………………………………………………………………・18 7.14 Sevcrability……………………………………………・・…………¨¨¨…………¨¨………………¨¨・・¨¨¨―¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨・・¨。18 7.15 Entire AgrecIInent.…..¨¨・・………¨¨・・…………¨¨¨¨…………¨¨¨¨・・…………………………………¨¨¨¨¨¨・・…18 7.16 Amendments.¨¨¨¨……¨¨¨¨¨・・……………¨¨……………・・…¨¨¨……………・・―¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨¨・・…¨¨・。19 -111- Contractor's Certification Attachment A: Supplemental Schedule of Contract Terms Attachment B: Specifications Attachment C: List of Drawings Attachment D: Special Project Requirernents Appendix 1: Prevailing Wages Appendix 2: Form of Performance Bond Appendix 3: Form of Labor and Materials Bond -lV― ⅥLLAGE OF OAK BR00K CONTRACT FOR FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT In consideration of the mutual promises set forth below, the Village of Oak Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, 60523, an Illinois municipal corporation ("Owner"), and Construction Solutions of Il.. Inc.. 12540 S. Holidav Drive. Unit D. Alsip. Illinois 60803. a Corporation ("Contractor"), make this Contract as of Date") and hereby agree as follows: 2018,(the躍フ♭ε″νθ ARTICLE I: THE WORK 1.1 Performance of the Work Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, must prcvide, perform, and complete all of the following, all of which is herein referred to as the "Worll'l 1. Labor. Equipment. Materials. and Supplies. Provide, perform, and complete, in the manner described and specified in this Contract, all necessary work, labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other means and items necessary to accomplish the Project at the Work Site, both as defined in Attachment A, in accordance with the specifications attached hereto as Attachment B, the drawings identified in the list attached hereto as Attachment C, and the Special Project Requiranents attached hereto as Attachment D. 2. Permits. Except as otherwise provided in Attachment A, procure and furnish all permits, licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith. 3. Bonds and Insurance. Procure and fumish all Bonds and all certificates of insurance specified in this Contract. 4. Taxes. Pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes. 5. Miscellaneous. Do all other things required of Contractor by this Contract, including without limitation arranging for utility and other services needed for the Work and for testing, including the installation of temporary utility lines, wiring, switches, fixtures, hoses, connections, and meters, and providing sufficient sanitary conveniences and shelters to accommodate all workers and all personnel of Owner engaged in the Work. CONTRACT D. Responsibility for Delay. Contractor is resiponsible for any delay in the Work due to delay in providing Required Submittals conforming to rlhis Contract. 1.4 Review and Interpretation of Contract Provisiorns Contractor represents and warrants that it has carefully reviewed this Conhact, including all of its Attachments, and the drawings identified in y'rttachment C, all of which are by this reference incorporated into and made a part of this Confi'act. Contractor must, at no increase in the Contract Price, provide workmanship, equipment, marterials, and supplies that fully conform to this Contract. Whenever any equipment, materials or supplies are specified or described in this Contract by using the name or other identifoing feature of a proprietary product or the name or other identifinng feature of a particular manufacturer or vendor, the specific item mentioned is understood as establishing the type, function and quality desired. Other manufacturers' or vendors' products may be accepted, provided that the products proposed are equivalent in substance and function to those named as determined by Crwner in its sole and absolute discretion. Contractor must promptly notifu Owner of any discrepancy, error, omission, ambiguity, or conflict among any of the provisions of this Contract before proceeding with any Work aflected thereby. If Contractor fails to give such notice to Owner, then the subsequent decision of Owner as to which provision of this Contract governs is final, and any corrective work required does not entitle Contractor to any damages, to any compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or to any delay or extension of the Contract Time. When the equipment, materials, or supplies furnished by Contractor cannot be installed as specified in this Contract, Contractor must, without any increase in the Contract Price, make all modifications required to properly install the equipment, materials, or supplies. Any such modification is subject to the prior review and consent of Owner. 1.5 Conditions at the Work Site: Record Drawinss Contractor represents and warrants that it has had a sufficient opportunity to conduct a thorough investigation of the Work Site and the surrounding area and has completed such investigation to its satisfaction. Contractor will have no olaim for damages, for compensation in excess of the Contract Price, or for a delay or extension of the Contract Time based upon conditions found at, or in the vicinity of, the Work Site. When information pertaining to subsurface, underground or other concealed conditions, soils analysis, borings, test pits, utility locations or conditions, buried structures, condition of existing structures, and other investigations is or has been provided by Owner, or is or has been otherwise made available to Contractor by Owner, such information is or has been provided or made available solely for the convenience of Contractor and is not part of this Contract. Owner assumes no responsibility whatever in respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of such information, and there is no guaranty or warranty, either expressed or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout the Work or the Work Site, or that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing at any particular location, or that the conditions indicated may not change, or that unanticipated conditions may not be present. CONTRACT 6. Ouality. Provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner, consistent with the highest standards of professional and construction practices and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract, and with the greatest economy, efficiency, and expedition consistent therewith, with only new, undamaged and first quality equipment, materials, and supplies. 1.2 Commencement and Completion Dates Contractor must commence the Work not later than the "Commencement Date" set forth on Attachment A and must diligently and continuously prosecute the Work at such arate as will allow the Work to be fully provided, performed, and completed in full compliance with this Contract not later than the "Completion Date" set forth in Attachment A. The time of cofllmencement, rate of progress, and time of completion are referred to in this Contract as the "Contract Time." 1.3 Required Submittals A. Submittals Required. Contractor must submit to Owner all documents, data, and information specifically required to be submitted by Contractor under this Contract and must, in addition, submit to Owner all such drawings, specifications, descriptive information, and engineering documents, data, and information as may be required, or as may be requested by Owner, to show the details of the Work, including a complete description of all equipment, materials, and supplies to be provided under this Contract ("Required Submittals"). Such details must include, but are not limited to, design data, structural and operating features, principal dimensions, space required or provided, clearances required or provided, typo and brand of finish, and all similar matters, for all components of the Work. B. Number and Format. Contractor must provide three complete sets for each Required Submittal. All Required Submiuals must be prepared on white 8-ll2"xl1" paper. C. Time of Submission and Owner's Revierv. All Required Submittals must be provided to Owner no later than the time, if any, specified in this Contract for their submission or, if no time for submission is specified, in sufficient time, in Owner's sole opinion, to permit Owner to review the same prior to the commencement of the part of the Work to which they relate and prior to the purchase of any equipment, materials, or supplies that they describe. Owner will have the right to require such corrections as may be necessary to make such submittals conform to this Contract. All such submittals will, after final processing and review with no exception noted by Owner, become a part of this Contract. No Work related to any submittal may be performed by Contractoruntil Ownerhas completed review of such submittal with no exception noted. Owner's review and stamping of any Required Submittal will be for the sole purpose of examining the general management, design, and details of the proposed Work, does not relieve Contractor of the entire responsibility for the performance of the Work in firll compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to this Contract, and may not be regarded as any assumption of risk or liability by Owner. …2- CONTRACT Contractor is solely responsible for locating all existing underground installations by prospecting no later than two workdays prior to any scheduled excavation or trenching, whichever is earlier. Contractor must check all dimensions, elevations, and quantities indicated in this Contract within the same time period as set forth above for prospecting underground installations. Contractor must lay out the Work in accordance with this Clontract and must establish and maintain such locations, lines and levels. Wherever pre-existing work is encountered, Conkactor must verifu and be responsible for dimensions and location of such pre-existing work. Contractor must notifu Owner of any discrepancy between the dimensionsi, elevations and quantities indicated in this Contract and the conditions of the Work Site or any other elrors, omissions or discrepancies which Contract may discover during such inspections. Full instructions will be furnished by Owner should such error, omission, or discrepancy be discovered, and Contractor must carry out such instructions as if originally specified and without any'increase in Contract Price. Before Final Acceptance of the Work, Contractor must submit to Owner two sets of Drawings of Record, unless a greater number is specified edsewhere in this Contract, indicating all field deviations from Attachment B or the drawings identified in Attachment C. 1.6 Technical Abilitv to Perform Contractor represents and warants that it is sufficiently experienced and competent, and has the necessary capital, facilities, plant, organization, and staff, to provide, perform and complete the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. 1.7 Financial Abilitv to Perform Contractor represents and warrants that it is financially solvent, and Contractor has the financial resources necessary to provide, perform and complete the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. Time Contractor represents and warrants that it is ready, willing, able and prepared to begin the Work on the Commencement Date and that the Contr,act Time is sufficient time to permit completion of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract for the Contract Price, all with due regard to all natural and man-made conditions that may affect the Work or the Work Site and all difficulties, hindrances,, and delays that may be incident to the Work. 1.9 Safetv at the Work Site Contractor is solely and completely responsible for providing and maintaining safe conditions at the Work Site, including the safety of all persons and property during performance of the Work. This requirement applies continuously and is not limited to normal working hours. Contractor must take all safety precautions as necessary to comply with all applicable laws and to prevent injury to persons and damage to property. 1.8 -4- CONTRACT Contractor must conduct all of its operations without intemrption or interference with vehicular and pedestrian trafEc on public and private rights-of-way, unless it has obtained permits therefor from the proper authorities. If any public or private right-of-way are rendered unsafe by Contractor's operations, Contractor must make such repairs or provide such temporary ways or guards as are acceptable to the proper authorities. 1.10 Cleanliness of the Work Site and Environs Contractor must keep the Work Site and adjacent areas clean at all times during performance of the Work and must, upon completion of the Work, leave the Work Site and adjacent areas in a clean and orderly condition. 1.11 Damase to the Work. the Work Site. and Other Propertv The Work and everything pertaining thereto is provided, performed, completed, and maintained at the sole risk and cost of Contractor from the Commencement Date until Final Payment. Contractor is fully responsible for the protectio:n of all public and private property and all persons. Without limiting the foregoing, Contractor must, at its own cost and expense, provide all permanent and temporary shoring, anchoring and bracing required by the nature of the Work in order to make all parts absolutely stable and rigid, even when such shoring, anchoring and bracing is not explicitly specified, and support and protect all buildings, bridges, roadways, conduits, wires, water pipes, gas pipes, sewers, pavements, curbs, sidewalks, fixfures and landscaping of all kinds and all other public or private property that may be encountered or endangered in providing, performing and completing the Work. Contractor will have no claim against Owner because of any damage or loss to the Work or to Contractor's equipment, materials, or supplies from any cause whatsoever, including damage or loss due to simultaneous work by others. Contractor must, promptly and without charge to Owner, repair or replace, to the satisfaction of Owner, any damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work and any damage done to, and any loss suffered by, the Work Site or other property as a result of the Work. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, ConLtractor's obligations under this Section exist without regard to, and maynotbe construed to be waived by, the availabilityorunavailability of any insurance, either of Owner or Contractor, to inrlernni$2, hold harmless, or reimburse Contractor for the cost of any repair or replacement work required by this Section. 1.12 Subcontractors and Suppliers A. Approval and Use of Subcontractors and Suppliers. Contractor must perform the Work with its own personnel and under the managernerrt, supervision, and control of its own organization unless otherwise approved by Owner in writing. All subcontractors, suppliers, and subcontracts used by Contractor must be acceptable to, and approved in advance by, Owner. Owner's approval of any subcontractor, supplier, and subcontract does not relieve Contractor of full responsibility and liability for the provision, performarrce, and completion of the Work in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. All Work performed under any subcontract is subject to all of the provisions of this Contract in the same manner as if performed by employees of Contractor. Every reference in this Contract to "Contractor" is deemed also to ‐5‐ CONTRACT refer to all subcontractors and suppliers of Contractor. Every subcontract must include a provision binding the subcontractor or supplier to all provisions of tlhis Contract. B. Rernoval of Subcontractors and Suppliers. If any subcontractor or supplier fails to perform the part of the Work undertaken by it in a manner satisfactory to Owner, Contractor must immediately upon notice from Owner terminate such subcontractor or supplier. Contractor will have no claim for damages, for compensation in excess ,cf the Contract Price, or for a delay or extension of the Contract Time as a result of any such termination. 1.13 Simultaneous Work Bv Others Owner has the right to perform or have performed such other work as Owner may desire in, about, or near the Work Site during the performance of the Work by Conkactor. Contractor must make every reasonable effort to perform the Work in such manner as to enable both the Work and such other work to be completed without hindrance or interference from each other. Contractor must afford Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of such other work and must properly coordinate the Work u,ith such other work. l.l4 Occupancv Prior to Final Pavment Owner will have the right, at its election, to occup)/, use, or place in service any part of the Work prior to Final Payment. Such occupancy, use, or placement in service must be conducted in such manner as not to damage any of the Work or to unreasonably interfere with the progress of the Work. No such occupancy, use, or placement in service may be construed as an acceptance of any of the Work or a release or satisfaction of Contractor's duty to insure and protect the Work, nor may it, unless conducted in an unreasonable manner,, be considered as an interference with Contractor's provision, performance, or completion of the Work. 1.15 Owner's Risht to Terminate or Suspend Work for Convenience A. Termination or Suspension for Convenience. Owner has the right, for its convenience, to terminate or suspend the Work in whole or in part at any time by written notice to Contractor. Every such notice must state the extent ancl effective date of such termination or suspension. On such effective date, Contractor must, as and to the extent directed, stop Work under this Contract, cease all placernent of further orderri or subcontracts, terminate or suspend Work under existing orders and subcontracts, cancel any outstanding orders or subcontracts that may be cancelled, and take any action necessary to protect any property in its possession in which Owner has or may acquire any interest and to dispose of such property in such manner as may be directed by Owner. B. Payment for Completed Work. In the ov€flt of any termination pursuant to Subsection 1.15A above, Owner must pay Contractor (1) such direct costs, excluding overhead, as Contractor has paid or incurred for all Work done in compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract up to the effective date of termirration together with ten percent of such costs for overhead and profit; and (2) such other costs pertaining to the Work, exclusive of overhead and profit, as Contractor may have reasonably amd necessarily incurred as the result of ‐6‐ CONTRACT such termination. Any such payment may be offset by any prior payment or payments and is subject to Owner's rights to withhold and deduct as provided in this Contract. ARTICLE II: CHANGES AND DELAYS 2.1 Changes Owner has the right, by written order executed by Owner, to make changes in the Contract, the Work, the Work Site, and the Contract Time ("Change Order"). If any Change Order causes an increase or decrease in the amount of the Work, an equitable adjusfinent in the Contract Price or Contract Time may be made. All claims by Contractor for an equitable adjustnent in either the Contract Price or the Contract Time must be made within two business days following receipt of such Change Order, and may, if not made prior to such time, be conclusively deemed to have been waived. No decrease in the amount of the Work caused by any Change Order will entitle Contractor to make any claim for damages, anticipated profits, or other compensation. 2.2 DeIavs A. Extensions forUnavoidable Delays. For anydelaythatmayresult from causes that could not be avoided or controlled by Contractor, Contractor must, upon timely written application, be entitled to issuance of a Change Order providing for an extension of the Contract Time for a period of time equal to the delay resulting from such unavoidable cause. No extension of the Contract Time will be allowed for any other delay in completion of the Work. B. No Compensation for Delays. No payment, compensation, damages, or adjustment of any kind, other than the extension of the Contract Time provided in Subsection 2.2A above, may be made to, or claimed by, Contractor because of hindrances or delays from any cause in the commencement, prosecution, or completion of the Work, whether caused by Owner or any other party and whether avoidable or unavoidable. ARTICLE III: CONTRACTOR,S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DEFECTIVE WORK 3.1 Inspection: Testins: Correction of Defects A. lnspection. Until Final Payment, all parts of the Work are subject to inspection and testing by Owner or its designated representatives. Contractor must furnish, at its own expense, all reasonable access, assistance, and facilities required by Owner for such inspection and testing. B. Re-Inspection. Re-inspection and re-testing of any Work may be ordered by Owner at any time, and, if so ordered, any covered or closed Work must be uncovered or opened by Contractor. If the Work is found to be in full compliance with this Contract, then Owner must pay the cost of uncovering, opening, re-inspecting, or re-testing, as the case may be. If such Work is not in full compliance with this Contract, then Contractor must pay such cost. ‐7‐ CONTRACT C. Correction. Until Final Payment, Contractor must, promptly and without charge, repair, correct, or replace all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, or unsuitable or that in any way fails to conform strictly to th.e requirements of this Contract. 3.2 Warrantv of Work A. Scope of Warranty. Contractor warrants that the Work and all of its components will be free from defects and flaws in design, workmanship, and materials; must strictly conform to the requirements of this Contract; and will be fit, sufEcient, and suitable for the purposes expressed in, or reasonably inferred from, this Contract. The warranty herein expressed is in addition to any other warranties expressed in this Contract, or expressed or implied by law, which are hereby reserved unto Owner. B. Repairs: Extension of Warranty. Contractor, promptly and without charge, must correct any failure to fulfill the above warranty that ma1,be discovered or develop at any time within one year after Final Payment or such longer period as may be prescribed in Attachment B or Attachment D to this Contract or by law. The above w'arranty may be extended automatically to cover all repaired and replacement parts and labor provided or performed under such warranty and Contractor's obligation to correct Work may be extended for a period of one year from the date of such repair or replacement. The time period established in this Subsection 3.2B relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct Work and may not be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations that Contractor has under this Contract. C. Subcontractor and Supplier Warranties. Whenever Attachment B or Attachment D requires a subcontractor or supplier to provide a guaranty or warranty, Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining said guaranty or waranty in form satisfactory to Owner and assigning said warranty or guaranty to Owner. Acceptance of any assigned warranties or guaranties by Owner is a precondition to Final Payment and does not relieve Contractor of any of its guaranty or warranty obligations under this Contract. 3.3 Owner's Right to Correct If, within two business days after Owner gives Contractor notice of any defect, damage, flaw, unsuitability, nonconformity, or failure to meet warranty subject to correction by Contractor pursuant to Section 3.1 or Section 3.2 of this Contract, Contractor neglects to make, or undertake with due diligence to make, the necessary corrections, then Owner is entitled to make, either with its own forces or with contract forces, the corrections and to recover from Contractor all resulting costs, expenses, losses, or damages, including attorneys' fees and administrative expenses. ARTICLE IV: FINANCIAL ASSURANCES Bonds Contemporaneous with Contractor's execution of this Contract, Contractor must provide a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond, on forms provided by, or otherwise acceptable to, Owner, from a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Illinois with 4.1 CONTRACT a general rating of A and a financial size category of Class X or better in Best's Insurance Guide, each in the penal sum of the Contract Pnce ("Bonds"). Contractor, at all times while providing, performing, or completing the Work, including, without limitation, at all times while correcting any failure to meet warranty pursuant to Section 3.2 of this Contract, must maintain and keep in force, at Contractor's expense, the Bonds required hereunder. 4.2 Insurance Confactor hereby agrees and will, at its expense, carry insurance pursuant to the terms, conditions, and coverages set forth in Attachment A. 4.3 Indemnification Contractor hereby agrees to and will indemniS, and save harmless Owner and all of it elected officials, officers, employees, attorneys, agents, and representatives against any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses, including attomeys' fees and administrative expenses, that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor's performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof, whether or not due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive, or concurrent negligence or fault of Contractor, except to the extent caused solely by the negligence of Owner. ARTICLE V: PAYMENT 5.1 Contract Price Owner must pay to Contractor, in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Article V and Attachment A, and Contractor must accept in full satisfaction for providing, performing, and completing the Work, the amorurt or amounts set forth in Attachment A (the "Contract Price"), subject to any additions, deductions, or withholdings provided for in this Contract. 5.2 Taxes and Benefits Owner is exempt from and will not be responsible to pay, or reimburse Contractor for, any state or local sales, use, or excise taxes. The Contract Price includes all other applicable federal, state, and local taxes of every kind and nature applicable to the Work as *ell as all taxes, contributions, and premiums for unernployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits. All claim or right to claim additional compensation by reason of the payment of any such tax, contribution, or premium is hereby waived and released by Contractor. 5.3 Progress Payments A. Payment in Installments. The Contract Price must be paid in monthly installments in the manner set forth in Attachment A ("Progress Payments"). -9- CONTRACT B. Pay Requests. The Village of Oak Brook authorizes the payment of invoices on the second and fourth Tuesday of the month. For consideration on one of these dates, payment request must be received no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the second or fourth Tuesday of the month. Each Pay Request must include (a) Contractor's certification of the value of, and partial or final waivers of lien covering, all Work for which payment is then requested and (b) Contractor's certification that all prior Progress Payments have been properly applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid. C. Work Entire. This Contract and the Work are entire and the Work as a whole is of the essence of this Contract. Notwithstanding any otherprovision of this Contract, each and every part of this Contract and of the Work are interdependent and common to one another and to Owner's obligation to pay all or any part of the Contract Price or any other consideration for the Work. Any and all Progress Payments made pursuant to this Article are provided merely for the convenience of Contractor and for no other purpose. 5,4 Final Acceptance and Final Pavment A. Notice of Completion. When the Work has been completed and is ready in all respects for acceptance by Owner, Contractor must notiff Owner and request a final inspection ("Notice of Completion"). Confractor's Notice of Completion must be given sufficiently in advance of the Completion Date to allow for scheduling of the final inspection and for completion or correction before the Completion Date of any items identified by such inspection as being defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or otherwise not in full compliance with, or as required by or pursuant to, this Contract ("Punch List Worll'). B. Punch List and Final Acceptance. The Work may be finally accepted when, and only when, the whole and all parts thereof have been completed to the satisfaction of Owner in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. Upon receipt of Contractor's Notice of Completion, Owner must make a review of the Work and notiff Contractor in writing of all Punch List Work, if any, to be completed or corrected. Following Contractor's completion or correction of all Punch List Work, Owner must make another review of the Work and prepare and deliver to Contractor either a written notice of additional Punch List Work to be completed or corrected or a written notice of final acceptance of the Work ("Final Acceptance"). C. Final Payment. As soon as practicable after Final Acceptance, Contractor must submit to Owner a properly completed final Pay Request in the form provided by Owner ("Final Pay Requesf"). Owner must pay to Contractor the balance of the Contract Price, after deducting therefrom all charges against Contractor as provided for in this Contract ("Final Payment"). Final Payment must be made not later than 60 days after Owner approves the Final Pay Request. The acceptance by Contractor of Final Payment will operate as a full and complete release of Owner of and from any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses of, by, or to Contractor for anything done, furnished for, arising out of, relating to, or in connection with the Work or for or on account of any act or neglect of Owner arising out of, relating to, or in connection with the Work. ‐10‐ 5.5 CONTRACT Liens A. Title. Nothing in this Contract maybe construed as vesting in Contractor any right of property in any equipment, materials, supplies, and other items provided under this Contract after they have been installed in, incorporated into, attached to, or affixed to, the Work or the Work Site. All such equipment, materials, supplies, and other items will, upon being so installed, incorporated, attached or affixed, become the property of Owner, but such title will not release Contractor from its duty to insure and protect the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Contract. B. Waivers of Lien. Contractor must, from tirne to time at Owner's request and in any event prior to Final Payment, furnish to Owner such receipts, releases, affidavits, certificates, and other evidence as may be necessary to establish, to the re,asonable satisfaction of Owner, that no lien against the Work or the public funds held by Owner exists in favor of any person whatsoever for or by reason of any equipment, material, supplies, or other item fumished, labor performed, or other thing done in connection with the Work or this Conffact ("Lien") and that no right to file any Lien exists in favor of any person whatsoever. C. Rernoval of Liens. If at any time any notice of any Lien is filed, then Contractor must, promptly and without charge, discharge, remove, or otherwise dispose of such Lien. Until such discharge, removal, or disposition, Owner will ha.re the right to retain from any money payable hereunder an amount that Owner, in its sole judgment, deems necessary to satisfu such Lien and to pay the costs and expenses, including attornevs' fees and administrative expenses, of any actions brought in connection therewith or by reason thereof. D. Protection of Owner Only. This Section does not operate to relieve Contractor's surety or sureties from any of their obligations under the Bonds, nor may it be deerned to vest any right, interest, or entitlement in any subcontractor or supplier. Owner's retention of funds pursuant to this Section is deemed solely for the protection of its own interests pending removal of such Liens by Contractor, and Owner will have no obligation to apply such funds to such removal but may, nevertheless, do so where Owner's interests would t.hereby be served. 5.6 Deductions A. Owner's Rieflrt to Withhold. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract and without prejudice to any of Owner's other rights or remedies, Owner will have the right at any time or times, whether before or after approval of any Pay Request, to deduct and withhold from any Progress or Final Payment that may be or become due under this Contract such amount as may reasonably appear necessary to compensate Owner for any actual or prospective loss due to: (l) Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; (2) damage for which Contractor is liable under this Contract; (3) state or local sales, use, or excise taxes from which Owner is exempt; (4) Liens or claims of Lien regardless of merit; (5) claims of subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons regardless of merit; (6) delay in the progress or completion of the Work; (7) inability of Contractor to complete the Work; (8) failure of Contractor to properly complete or document any Pay Request; (9) any other failure of Contractor to perform any of its obligations under this Contract; or (10) the cost to Owner, including attorneys' fees and -1 1- CONTRACT administrative costs, of correcting any of the aforesaid matters or exercising any one or more of Owner's rernedies set forth in Section 6.3 of this Contract. B. Use of Withheld Funds. Owner is entitled to retain any and all amounts withheld pursuant to Subsection 5.6,4. above until Contractor has either performed the obligations in question or furnished security for such performance satisfactory to Owner. Owner is entitled to apply any money withheld or any other money due Contractor under this Contract to reimburse itself for any and all costs, expenses, losses, damages, liabilities, suits, judgments, awards, attorneys' fees and administrative expenses incurred, suffered, or sustained by Owner and chargeable to Contractor under this Contract. ARTICLE VI: DISPUTES AI{D REMEDIES 6.1 Dispute Resolution Procedure A. Notice of Disputes and Objections. If Contractor disputes or objects to any requirement, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision of Owner, Contractor may notiff Owner in writing of its dispute or objection and of the amount of any equitable adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time to which Contractor claims it will be entitled as a result thereof; provided, however, that Contractor must, nevertheless, proceed without delay to perform the Work as required, directed, instructed, interpreted, determined, or decided by Owner, without regard to such dispute or objection. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner within trvo business days after receipt of such requirernent, direction, instruction, interpretation, determination, or decision, Contractor is conclusively deerned to have waived all such disputes or objections and all claims based thereon. B. Nesotiation of Disputes and Objections. To avoid and settle without litigation any such dispute or objection, Owner and Contractor agree to engage in good faith negotiations. Within three business days after Owner's receipt of Contractor's written notice of dispute or objection, a conference between Owner and Contractor will be held to resolve the dispute. Within three business days after the end of the conference, Owner rnust render its final decision, in writing, to Contractor. [f Contractor objects to the final decision of Owner, then it must, within three business days, give Owner notice thereof and, in such notice, must state its final demand for settlernent of the dispute. Unless Contractor so notifies Owner, Contractor will be conclusively deerned (1)to have agreed to and accepted Owner's final decision and (2)to have waived all claims based on such final decision. 6.2 Contractor's Remedies If Owner fails or refuses to satisff a final demand made by Contractor pursuant to Section 6.1 of this Contract, or to otherwise resolve the dispute which is the subject of such demand to the satisfaction of Contractor, within 10 days after receipt of such demand, then Contractor will be entitled to pursue such remedies, not inconsistent with the provisions of this Contract, as it may have in law or equity. ‐12‐ CONTRACT 6.3 Owner's Remedies If it should appear at any time prior to Final Payment that Contractor has failed or refused to prosecute, or has delayed in the prosecution of, the Work with diligence at a rate that assures completion of the Work in full compliance with the requirements of this Contract on or before the Completion Date, or has attempted to assign this Contract or Contractor's rights under this Contract, either in whole or in part, or has falsely made any representation or waranty in this Contract, or has otherwise failed, refused, or delayed to perform or satis$r any other requirement of this Contract or has failed to pay its debts as they come dte ("Event of Defaulf'), and has failed to cure any such Event of Default within five business days after Conhactor's receipt of written notice of such Event of Default, then Owner will have the right, at its election and without prejudice to any other remedies provided by law or equity, to pursue any one or more of the following rernedies: 1. Owner may require Contractor, within such reasonable time as may be fixed by Owner, to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; to remove from the Work Site any such Work; to accelerate all or any part of the Work; and to take any or all other action necessary to bring Contractor and th.e Work into strict compliance with this Contract. Owner may perform or have performed all Work necessary for the accomplishment of the results stated in Paragraph 1 above and withhold or recover from Contractor all the cost and expense, including attorneys' fees and administrative costs, incurred by Owner in connection therewith. Owner may accept the defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or dilatory Work or part thereof and make an equitable reduction in the Contract Price. Owner may terminate this Contract without liability for further payment of amounts due or to become due under this Contract. Owner may, without terminating this Contract, terminate Contractor's rights under this Contract and, for the purpose of completing or correcting the work, evict contractor and take possession of all equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, plans, specifications, schedules, manuals, drawings, and other papers relating to the Work, whether at the Work Site or elsewhere, and either complete or correct the Work with its own forces or contracted forces, all at Contractor's expense. Upon any termination of this Contract or of Contractor's rights under this Contract, and at Owner's option exercised in writing, any or all subcontracts and supplier contracts of Contractor will be deemed to be assigned to Owner without any further action being required, but owner may not thereby assume any obligation for 2. 4. 5. 6. -l 3- CONTRACT payments due under such subcontracts and supplier contracts for any Work provided or performed prior to such assign:nent. 7. Owner may withhold from any Progress Payment or Final Payment, whether or not previously approved, or may recover from Contractor, any and all costs, including attomeys' fees and adminishative expenses, incurred by Owner as the result of any Event of Default or as a result of actions taken by Owner in response to any Event of Default. 8. Owner may recover any damages suffered by Owner. 6.4 Owner's Additional Remedv for Delav If the Work is not completed by Contractor, in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract, within the Contract Time as such time may be extended by Change Order, then Owner may invoke its remedies under Section 6.3 of this Contract or may, in the exercise of its sole and absolute discretion, permit Contractor to complete the Work but charge to Contractor, and deduct from any Progress or Final Payments, whether or not previously approved, administrative expenses and costs for each day completion of the Work is delayed beyond the Completion Date, computed on the basis of the "Per Dietm Administrative Charge" set forth in Affachment A, as well as any additional damages caused by such delay. 6.5 Terminations and Suspensions Deemed for Convenience Any termination or suspension of Contractor's rights under this Contract for an alleged default that is ultimately held unjustified will automatically be deemed to be a termination or suspension for the convenience of Owner under Section I . I 5 of this Contract. ARTICLE VII: LEGAL REI,ATIONSHIPS AND REQTIIREMENTS 7.1 Bindine Effect This Contract is binding on Owner and Contractor and on their respective heirs, executors, administrators, personal representatives, and permitted successors and assigns. Every reference in this Contract to a party is deemed to be a reference to the authorized officers, employees, agents, and representatives ofsuch party. 7.2 Relationship of the Parties Contractor will act as an independent contractor in providing and performing the Work. Nothing in, nor done pursuant to, this Contract may be construed (1) to create the relationship of principal and agent, partners, or joint venfurers between Owner and Contractor or (2) except as provided in Paragraph 6.3(6) above, to create any relationship between Owner and any subcontractor or supplier of Contractor. -14- CONTRACT 7.3 NoCollusion/Prohibitedlnterests Contractor hereby represents that the only persons, firms, or corporations interested in this Contract as principals are those disclosed to Ownerprior to the execution of this Contract, and that this Contract is made without collusion with any other person, firm, or corporation. If at any time it is found that Contractor has, in procuring this Contract, colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation, then Contractor will be liable to Owner for all loss or damage that Owner may suffer thereby, and this Contract will, at Owner's option, be null and void. Contractor hereby represents and warrants that neilher Contractor nor any person affiliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner whatsoever, in the Work is acting, directly or indirectly, for or on behalf of any person, goup, entity or nation named by the United States Treasury Department as a Specially Designated National and Blocked Person, or for or on behalf of any person, Eroup, entity or nation designated in Presidential Executive Order 13224 as a person who commits, threatens to commit, or supports terrorism, and neither Contractor nor any person afEliated with Contractor or that has an economic interest in Contractor or that has or will have an interest in the Work or will participate, in any manner rvhatsoever, in the Work is, directly or indirectly, engaged in, or facilitating, the Work on behalf of any such person, group, entity or nation. 7.4 Assignment Contractor may not (1) assign this Contract in whole or in part, (2) assign any of Contractor's rights or obligations under this Contract, or (3) assign any payment due or to become due under this Contract without the prior express wriffen approval of Owner, which approval may be withheld in the sole and unfeuered discretion of Owner;provided, however, that Owner's prior written approval will not be required for assignments of accounts, as defined in the Illinois Commercial Code, if to do so would violate Section 9-318 of the Illinois Commercial Code, 810 ILCS 5/9-318. Owner may assign this Contract, in whole or in part, or any or all of its rights or obligations under this Contract, without the consent of Contractor. 7.5 Confidentiallnformation All information supplied by Owner to Contractor for or in connection with this Contract or the Work must be held confidential by Contractor and may not, without the prior express written consent of Owner, be used for any purpose other than perlbrmance of the Work. 7.6 No Waiver No examination, inspection, investigation, test, measurement, review, determination, decision, certificate, or approval by Owner, nor any order by Owner for the payment of money, nor any payment for, or use, occupancy, possession, or acceptance of the whole or any part of the Work by Owner, nor any extension of time granted by Owner, nor any delay by Owner in exercising any right under this Contract, nor any other act or omission of Owner may constitute or be deerned to be an acceptance of any defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming or ‐15‐ CONTRACT incomplete Work, equipment, materials, or supplies, nor operate to waive or otherwise diminish the ef[ect of any warranty or representation made by Contractor; or of any requiranent or provision of this Contract; or of any ronedy, power, or right of Owner. 7.7 No Third Partv Beneficiaries No claim as a third party beneficiary under this Contract by any person, firm, or corporation other than Contractor may be made or be valid against Owner. 7.8 Notices All notices required or permitted to be glven under this Contract must be in writing and are deemed received by the addressee thereof when delivered in person on a business day at the address set forth below or on the third business day after being deposited in any main or branch United States post ofEce, for delivery at the address set forth below by properly addressed, postage prepaid, certified or registered mail, return receipt requested. Notices and communications to Owner must be addressed to, and delivered at, the following address: Village of Oak Brook 1200 Oak Brook Road Oak Brook, Illinois 60523 Attention: Doug Patchin, Public Works Director Notices and communications to Contractor must be addressed to, and delivered at, the following address: Construction Solutions of Il.. lnc. 12540 S. Holiday Drive. Unit D Alsip. Illinois 60803 Attn: Peter Schipma. President The foregoing may not be deerned to preclude the use of other non-oral means of notification or to invalidate any notice properly given by any such other non-oral means. By notice complying with the requirements of this Section, Owner and Contractor each have the right to change the address or addressee or both for all future notices to it, but no notice of a change of address is effective until actually received. 7.9 Governins Laws This Contract and the rights of Owner and Contractor under this Contract will be interpreted according to the internal laws, but not the conflict of laws rules, of the State of Illinois; venue for any action related to this Contract will be in the Circuit Court of DuPage County, Illinois. -16‐ CONTRACT 7.10 Chanses in Laws Unless otherwise explicitly provided in this Contract, any reference to laws includes such laws as they may be amended or modified from time to tirne. 7.ll Compliance with Laws A. Compliance Required. Contractor must give all notices, pay all fees, and take all other action that may be necessary to ensure that the Work is provided, performed, and completed in accordance with all required governmental permits, licenses or other approvals and authorizations that maybe required in connection with providing, performing, and completing the Work, and with all applicable statutes, ordinances, rules, and regulations, including without limitation the Illinois Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (see Subsection C of this Section) (a copy of the prevailing rate of wages ascertained by the Illinois Department of Labor, in effect as of the date of this Contract, has been attached as an Appendix to this Contract; if the Illinois Department of Labor revises the prevailing rate of hourly wages to be paid, the revised rate applies to this Contract); any other applicable prevailing wage laws; the Fair Labor Standards Act; any statutes regarding qualification to do business; any statutes requiring preference to laborers of specified classes; the Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, 30 ILCS 56511 et seq.; any statutes prohibiting discrimination because of or requiring affirmative action based on, race, creed, color, national origin, age, sex, or other prohibited classification, including, without limitation, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990,42 U.S.C. $$ 12101 et seq., the Illinois Human Rights Act,775ILCS 5/l-101 et seq., and the Public Works Discrimination Act, 775 ILCS 10/0.01 et seq.; and any statutes regarding safety or the performance of the Work, including the Illinois Underground Utility Facilities Damage Prevention Act, 220 ILCS 50/1 et seq., and the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970,29 U.S.C. gg 651 et seq. B. Liability for Fines. Penalties. Contractor is solely liable for any fines or civil penalties that are imposed by any govemmental or quasi-governmental agency or body that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor's, or its subcontractors' or suppliers', performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof. C. Prevailine Wage Act. Contractor and each subcontractor, in order to comply with the Prevailing Wage Act,820 ILCS 130/0.01 et seq. (the "Acf'), must submit to the Village a certified payroll on a monthly basis, in accordance with Section 5 of the Act. The certified payroll must consist of a complete copy of those records required to be made and kept by the Act. The certified payroll must be accompanied by a statement si6gred by the contractor or subcontractor that certifies that (1) such records are true and accurate, (2) the hourly rate paid is not less than the general prevailing rate of hourly wages required by the Act, and (3) the contractor or subcontractor is aware that filing a certified payroll that he or she knows to be false is a Class B misdemeanor. Contractor may rely on the certification of a subcontractor, provided that Contractor does not knowingly rely on a subcontractor's false certification. On two business days' notice, Contractor and each subcontractor must make available for inspection the records required to be made and kept by the Act (i) to the Village and its officers and agents and to the Director of the Illinois Department of Labor and his or her deputies and agents and (ii) at all reasonable hours at a location within the State. -17- CONTRACT D. Required Provisions Deemed lnserted. Every provision of law required by law to be inserted into this Contract is deemed to be inserted herein. 7.12 Compliance with Patents A. Assumption of Costs. Royalties. and Fees. Contractor will pay or cause to be paid all costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work, of patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions. B. Effect of Contractor Beine Enjoined. Should Contractor be enjoined from furnishing or using any equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions supplied or required to be supplied or used under this Contract, Contractor must promptly offer substitute equipment, materials, supplies, lools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions in lieu thereof, of equal efficiency, quality, suitability, and market value, for review by Owner. If Owner should disapprove the offered substitutes and should elect, in lieu of a substitution, to have supplied, and to retain and use, any such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions as may by this Contact be required to be supplied, Contractor must pay such royalties and secure such valid licenses as may be requisite and necessary for Owner to use such equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions without being disturbed or in any way interfered with by any proceeding in law or equity on account thereof. Should Contractor neglect or refuse to make any approved substitution promptly, or to pay such royalties and secure such licenses as may be necessary, then Owner will have the right to make such substitution, or Orvner may pay such royalties and secure such licenses and charge the cost thereof against any money due Contractor from Owner or recover the amount thereof from Contractor and its surety or sureties notwithstanding that Final Payment may have been made. 7.13 Time The Contract Time is of the essence of this Contract. Except where otherwise stated, references in this Contract to days is construed to refer to calendar days. 7.14 Severabilitv The provisions of this Contract will be interpreted when possible to sustain their legality and enforceability as a whole. In the event any provision of this Contract is held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, in whole or in part, neither the validity of the remaining part of such provision, nor the validity of any other provisions of this Contract will be in any way affected thereby. 7.15 Entire Agreement This Contract sets forth the entire agreement of Orvner and Contractor with respect to the accomplishment of the Work and the payrnent of the Contract Price therefor, and there are no other CONTRACT understandings or agreelnents,oral or w五 tten,between Owner and Contractor with respectto the Work and the compensation therefor. 7.16 AInendnlents No lnodiflcation,addition,deletion,revision,alterlation or other change to this Contract is effective unless and until such change is reduced to lwritinig and executed and delivered by(Dwner and Contractor. ISIGNATURE PAGE FOl′LOWS] ‐19‐ CONTRACT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have caused this Contract to be executed by their properly authorized representatives in two original counterparts as of the Effective Date. By: Name: Title: Attest: By: Name: Title: By: Name: Title: Attest: By: Name: Title: -20- CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF CE\ CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION U^/e 'contractor's executing olficerJ, being first duly swom on oath, deposes ahd states that all statements herein made are made on behalf of Contractor, that this deponent is authorized to make them, and that the statements contained herein are true and correct. Contractor deposes, states, and certifies that Contractor is not barred from contracting with a unit of state or local government as a result of (i) a violation of either Section 33E-3 or Section 338-4 of Article 33E of the Criminal Code of 196l,720ILCS 5/33E-l et ggq.; or (ii) a violation of the USA Patriot Act of 2001, 107 Public Law 56 (October 26,2001) (the"Patriot Act") or other statutes, orders, rules, and regulations of the United States govemment and its various executive departments, agencies and offices related to the subject matter of the Patriot Act, including, but not limited to, Executive Order 13224 effective September 24,2001. DATED:/^6 ,20 t E. CONT By: Name: Title: By: Name: Title:)) SS)Subscribed and Swom to before me on (* W ,20rt My Commission ex (sEAL) VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROЛ CT ATTACHMENT A SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT TERMS fCheck applicable boxes and insert required information.J 1. Proiect: Renovation of the existing bunk room, and removal of existing flooring materials in bunk room as indicated in the drawings and described herein. The general contractor shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise. Scope of work includes, but not necessarily limited to, general interior dernolition of existing walls and flooring, new metal stud framing with gypsum wall board finish; wood trim, new electrical receptacles and fixtures, modification of existing;electrical can lights, ceiling patching, painting, and install all new casework including the legacy lockers, as well as finished wood bases, end panels, hardware and all accessories as shown on the drawings and described herein. Alternate Bid includes providing and installing new carpeting in Fire Station 93 Bunk Room (danolition for this work is part of the base bid. 2. Work Site: Fire Station 93, 725 Enterprise Drive, Oak Brooh, Illinois 60523. 3. Permits. Licenses. Approvals. and Authorizations: Contractor must obtain all required governmental permits, licenses, approvals, and authorizations. Commencement Date: No work is to begin until all product and material are on site at Fire no event later than erugmr:+.agg a*o&p,r 8, A O t E Completion Date: Substantial Completion bV SeptemberlJr2gf8. The Completion Date will be subject to equitable adjustment if the Commencement Date is delayed pursuant to Subsection 22A of the Contract. ∥″ettr…θ′ぎ2'∠ゞユ ⅥLLAGE OF OAK BR00K FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVATION PROECT ATTACHMENT A SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT TERMS [Check applicable boxes and insert required information.J 1. Proiect: Renovation of the existing bunk room, and rernoval of existing flooring materials in bunk room as indicated in the drawings and described herein. The general contactor shall provide and install all materials, unless noted otherwise. Scope of work includes, but not necessarily limited to, general interior dernolition of existing walls and flooring, new metal stud framing with glpsum wall board finish; wood trim, new electrical receptacles and fixtures, modification of existing electrical can lights, ceiling patching, painting, and install all new casework including the legacy lockers, as well as finished wood bases, end panels, hardware and all accessories as shown on the drawings and described herein. Alternate Bid includes providing and installing new carpeting in Fire Station 93 Bunk Room (demolition for this work is part of the base bid. 2. W!!g: Fire Station 93,725 Enterprise Drive, Oak Brook, Illinois 60523. 3. Permits. Licenses. Approvals. and Authorizations: Contractor must obtain all required governmental permits, licenses, approvals, and authorizations. 4. Commencement Date: No work is to begin until all product and material are on site at Fire Station 93, but in no event later than August 27,2018. 5. Completion Date: Substantial Completion by September 77,2018. The Completion Date will be subject to equitable adjustment if the Commencernent Date is delayed pursuant to Subsection 2.2A of the Contract. 6. ATTACHMENT A Insurance Coverage: Certificates of lnsurance shall be presented to Owner within fifteen (15) days after the receipt by the Confactor of the Notice of Award and the unexecuted contact, it being understood and agreed that the Owner will not approve and execute the Conhact until acceptable insurance certificates are received and approved by Owner. Each confractor performing any work pursuant to a contract with Owner and each permittee working under a permit as required pursuant to the provisions of Tifle I of Chapter 8 of the Code of Ordinances of the Village of Oak Brook (hereinafter referred to as "Insured') shall be required to carry such insurance as specified herein. Such contactor and permittee shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract or permit insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work under the confiact or permit, either by the contactor, permittee, or their agents, representatives, employees or subcontactors. A conhactor or permittee shall maintain insurance with limits no less than: A. Ge,neral Liability - $2,000,000 combined single limit per occum€nce for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage, provided that when the estimated cost of the work in question does not exceed $25,000, the required limit shall be $1,000,000; B. Automobile Liability (if applicable) - $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and property damage; C. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability - Worker's Compensation limits as required by the Labor Code of the State of Illinois and Employer's Liability limits of $ 1,000,000 per accident. Any deductibles or self-insured retention must be declared to and approved by Owner. At the option of Owner, either the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductible or self- insured retention as respect to Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers; or the Insured shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigations, claim administation and defense expenses to the exte,nt of such deductible or self-insured retention. The policies shall contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: D. General Liability and Automobile Liability Coverage - (l) The Owner, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as additional insureds as respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Insured; premises owned, occupied or used by the lnsured. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers, or agents. -2¨ ATTACⅡMENT A (2) The Insured's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents. Anyinsurance or self-insurance maintained by the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers or agents shall be in excess of the lnsured's insurance and shall not contribute with it. (3) Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to the Owner, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers or agents. (4) The lnsured's insurance shall apply separately to each covered party against whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. E. Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverage The policy shall waive all rights of subrogation against the Owno, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents for losses arising from work performed by the insured for the Owner. Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended, voided, canceled by either parly, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail has been given to Owner. Each insurance policy shall name the Owner, its officers, officials and employees, volunteers and agents as Additional Insureds. Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a Best's rating of no less than A: VII. Each Insured shall fumish the Owner with certificates of insurance and with original endorsements effecting coverage required by this provision. The certificate and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be on forms approved by the Owner and shall be subject to approval by the Village Attomey before work commences. The Owner reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all required insurance policies, at any time. Each insured shall include all subcontractors as in-sureds under its policies or shall fumish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. Builders Risk Insurance. This insurance must be written in completed value form, must protect Contractor and Owner against "all risks" of direct physical loss to buildings, structures, equipment, and materials to be used in providing, performing, ffid completing the Worl,; including without limitation fire extended coverage, vandalism and malici,ous mischief, sprinkler leakage, flood, trD -3- trE ATTACIIMENT A earth movement and collapse, and must be designed for the circumstances that may affect the Work. This insurance must be written with limits not less than the insurable value of the Work at completion. The insurable value must include the aggregate value of Owner-furnished equipment and materials to be constructed or installed by Confractor. This insurance must include coverage while equipment or materials are in warehouses, during installation, during testing, and after the Work is completed, but prior to Final Payment. This insurance must include coverage while Owner is occupying all or any part of the Work prior to Final Payment without the need for the insurance company's consent. Owner's and Conhactor's Protective Liability Insurance. Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, must purchase this lnsurance in the name of Owner with a combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less than $1,000,000. Umbrella Policy. The required coverage may be in the form of an umbrella policy above $2,000,000 primary coverage. All umbrella policies must provide excess coverage over underlying insurance on a following-form basis so that, when any loss covered by the primary policy exceeds the limits under the primary policy, the excess or umbrella policy becomes ef[ective to cover that loss. Deductible. Each policy must have a deductible or self-insured retention of not more than $ Owner as Additional Insured. Owner must be named as an Additional Insured on the following policies: General Liabilitv The Additional Insured endorsement must identifu Owner as follows: The Village of Oak Brook and its boards, commissions, committees, authorities, employees, agencies, officers, voluntary associations, and other units operating under the jurisdiction and within the appointment of its budget. F. nc XH. -4- X7. ATTACHMENT A I. Other Parties as Additional Insureds. In addition to Owner, the following parties must be named as additional insured on the following policies: Additional Insured Arcon Associates lnc. Contract Price: SCHEDI]LE OF PRICES A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT 1. Provide and install all materials needed forthe renovation ofthe existing Fire Station 93 Bunk Room and demolition of existing flooring. For providing, performing, and completing Work, the total Contract Price of : $ 71.723.00 ln words Seventy-One Thousand Seven Hundred and Twenty-Three Dollars 2. Alternate Bid: Provide and install new carpeting in Bunk Room. Demolition for this work is part of the base bid. $ In words Progress Pavments: A. General. Owner must pay to Contractor 90 percent of the Value of Work, determined in the manner set forth below, installed and complete in place up to the day before the Pay Request, less the aggregate of all previous Progress Paymrents. The total amount of Progress Payments made prior to Final Acceptance by Owner may not exceed 90 percent of the Contract Price. B. Value of Work. The Value of the Work will be determined as follows: (1) Lump Sum Items. For all Work to be paid on a lump sum basis, Contractor must, not later than 10 days after execution of the Contract and before submitting its first Pay Request, submit to Owner a schedule showing the value of each component part of such Work in form and with substantiating data acceptable to Owner ("Breakdown Schedule"). Policy or Policies -5- ATTACHMENT A The sum of the items listed in the Breakdown Schedule must equal the amount or amounts set forth in the Schedule of Prices for Lump Sum Work. An unbalanced Breakdown Schedule providing for overpayment of Contractor on component parts of the Work to be performed first will not be accepted. The Breakdown Schedule must be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Owner. No payment may be made for any lump sum item until Conkirctor has submitted, and Owner has approved, an acceptable Breakdo'wn Schedule. Owner may require that the approved Breakdown Schedule be revised based on developments occurring during the provision and performance ofthe Work. If Contractor fails to submit a revised Breakdown Schedule that is acceptable to Owner, Owner will have the right either to suspend Progress and Final Payments for Lump Sum Work or to make such Payments based on Owner's determination of the value of the Work completed. (2) Unit Price Items. For all Work to be paid on a unit price basis, the value of such Work will be determined by Owner on the basis of the actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Iterns installed and complete in place, multiplied by the applicable Unit Price set forth in the Schedule of Prices. The actual number of acceptable units installed and complete in place will be measured on the basis described in Affachment B to the Contract or, in the absence of such description, on the basis determined by Owner. The number of units of Unit Price Items stated in the Schedule of Prices are Owner's estimate only and may not be used in establishing the Progress or Final Payments due Contractor. The contract Price will be adjusted to reflect the actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Iterns installed and complete in place upon Final Acceptance. C. Application of Payments. All Progress and Final Payments made by Owner to Contractor will be applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid and will not be applied to or used for any pre- existing orunrelated debt between Contractor and Owner orbetween Contractor and any third party. 9. Per Diem Administrative Charse: $500 per day. 10. Standard Specifications: The Contract also includes Owner's Village Code and Building Codes. -6- ATTACⅡMENT A References to any of these codes means the latest editions erective on the date of the bid openlng. See Attadunent D for any special proJect requirements. ‐7‐ ATTACHⅣIENT B VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00PIRENOVATION PROJECT ATTACHⅣIENT B SPECIFICATIONS PROJE(F MANUAL FOR BUNK R00M RENOVAT10N OAK BR00K FIRE DEPノ嘔tlヽ圧N『 STA■ON 93 725 El嘔ヨ田RISE Dm電 OAK BR00K,ILLINOIS 60523 JIINE 12,2018 PROJECT NO.15095.2 0WNER:VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K 12(Ю OAK BR00K ROAD OAK BR00K,ILLINOIS 60523 ARCHITECT:ARCON ASSOCIAttS,INC. 2050S.FINLEY ROAD,SlЛ ‐40 LOMBARD,ILLINOIS 60148 CONStyLTANT:AMSCO ENGINEERING 5115 BELMONT ROAD DOWNERS GROVE,ILLINOIS 60515 AT ARCON 15095.2 000101…1TITLE PAGE TABLE OF CONmNTS DIVISION CXI・ PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQllIREMEN器 Section 00 01 01‐Title Page Section 00 01 10‐Table of Contents DIVISION 01Ⅲ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Sectton 01 00 00‐General Requirements Section 01 23 CXl‐Altemates Section 01 33 00‐Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples DrVISIoN 02・ EXISTING CONDI■ONS Section 02 41 19‐Sdective Demolition DIVISION 06・ W00D,PLASnCS AND COMPOS11旺弼 S∝tion 06 10 01‐Rough Carpenty Section 06 40 00‐Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVIS10N 09‐FINISHES Section 09 21 16‐Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 09 50 00‐Ceilings Section 09 65 00‐Resilient FlooHng Section 09 68 10-Carpet Tile Section 09 90 00‐Painting DIVISION 26・ ELECTRICAL Section 26 00 10-Basic Electrical Requlrements Section 26 05 19‐Building Wire Section 26 05 29‐Cutting,Patcl五 ng,Sleeves,Hangers,and Supports Section 26 05 34‐Conduit Section 26 05 37‐lBoxes Section 26 05 53-Identiflcation For Elecmcal systerns Section 26 27 17-Equipment Wiring Section 26 27 26‐Wiring Devices DIVIS10N 27‐COMMUNICA■ONS Section 27 10 05‐Stuctured Cabling for Voice and l)ata‐Insidc Plant 000101-1 000110_1 01 CXICЮ _1_10 012300‐1-2 013300-1-4 024119-1-5 061001-1-4 064000‐1‐4092116-1-10 095000-1_5 096500-1‐6096810-1-6 099000‐1-14 260010_1-9 260519-1-7 260529-1‐3260534-1-8 260537‐1-6 260553‐1-6 262717-1‐2262726-1‐5271005‐1‐15 ARCON 15095。2000110‐1TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 01 00 00 GENERAL RBQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 LOCALCODES A. Each Contractor complies with specified and applicable codes and standards. If conflict between codes or standards and drawings, specifications or addenda requirements, more stringent requirements shall govern. 1.02 RELATEDDOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Sections of Division 0l shall govern the execution of the work of all sections of the specifications. I.O3 E}.I\4RONMENTAL CONTROL A. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable feder'al, state, and local laws, regulations, ordinances, codes for standards conceming environmental control. Particular attention shall be given, witlout limitation, to: 1 . Reduction of air pollution by control of refuse buming (if permitted), minimization of dust, containment ofchemical vapors, control ofengine exhaust gases, and control of smoke from temporary heaters. 2. Reduction of water pollution by control of sanitary facilities, proper storage of fuels and other potential contaminants, and prevention of siltation from land erosion.3. Minimization of noise levels. 4. Proper and legal disposal, offsite unless otherwise provided, ofwaste and soil resulting from construction activities. 5- Proper and legal disposal ofexcavated spoils resulting from construction activities per Illinois Public Act 96-1416 and the Illinois Environmental protection Agency.6. Proper and legal disposal at acceptable landfill ofnon-hazardous special waste ifsoil analysis determines that excavated spoils are not suitable for a ccDD Facility t.M SUBSTTTUTTONS C.OR EQUAL") A. The Contractor or any Subcontractor's Proposal shall be based upon the materials, equipment, or processes specifically named in the Contract Documents. The word "processes" as used herein includes methods or systems of construction. B. Products are generally specified by ASTM or other reference standard, and/or by manufacturer's name and model number or trade name. When specified only by reference standard, the Contractor may select any product meeting this standard, by any manufacturer. When several products or manufacturers are specified as being equally acceptable, the Contractor has the option of using any product and manufacturer combination listed. C. Before the Pre-bid Meeting, or in the absence thereof l0 days prior to the Bid Opening, the Owner and Architect vrill consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified under the following conditions: l. The request is accompanied by complete data on the proposed substitution substantiating ARCON 15095。2010000‐1GENERAL REQTIIREMENTS compliance with the Contract Documents, including product identification and description, performance and test data, refercnces and samples where applicable, and an itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the products specified with data relating to Contract Time Schedule, design and artistic effect where applicable, and its relationship to separate contracts. 2. The request is accompanied by accurate cost data on the proposed substitution in comparison with the product specified, whether or not modification of the Contract Sum is to be a consideration. D. Request for substitution based on paragraph above, when forwarded by the Contractor to the Architect, are understood to mean that the Contractor: l. Represents that he has personally investigarcd the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;2. Will provide the same guarantee for the substitution that he would for that specified;3. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts and the Architect's re-design cost, and that he waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution whiih subsequently become apparent; and 4. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the work to be completed in all respects. 5. The Owner and Architect do not have to consider substitutions after the Pre- bid Meeting. No substitutions shall be made unless acceptable to the Owner and Architect in writing. 1.05 TEMPORARY SERVICES A. Contractor shall provide own power. B. Water is available from the building, Contractor shall field verify locations prior to bid. C. Owner will not provide access to toilet facilities. D. Contractor will provide his own temporary ofFrce and phone, if needed or required. E. Contractor will remove all temporary facilities upon completion of the project. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION SCIIEDULE A. The Contractor, within 14 calendar days from the contract date, shall prepare and submit for the Architect's review an estimated Construction Schedule for the work. The Construction Schedule shall be related to the entire project to the extent required by the Contract Documents. This schedule shall indicate the dates for the starting and completion of the various stages of construction and shall be revised as required by the conditions ofthe work, subject to the Owner's approval. B. The Construction Schedule shall be coordinated uith the "Shop Drawings and product Data" schedule called for in Division 01 Section "Shop Drawings and Product Data". Both schedules shall be submitted at the same time. C. If the work falls behind the approved Construction Schedule, the Owner shall have the authority to direct the Contractor to perform overtime work and holiday work, with the affected subcontractors, to maintain the schedule. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. D' The Contractor and all Subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers shall schedule materials, deliveries and installations to conform with the Construction Schedule and provisions to this ARCON 15095。2010000‐2GEMRAL REQI.'IREMENTS effect shall be included in all subcontracts. It is understood and agreed by all the Contractors that the materials, tools, equipment, building or work is entirely at their risk until same is completed. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the loss by theft or damage. The Owner and other Contractors may be working at the site during the performance of the conffact. The Owner reserves the right to direct ttre Contractor to schedule the order of this work in such a manner as to not unreasonably inte.rfere with the performance by the Owner and other Contractors. 1.07 CONTRACTOR INSPECIION The Contractor shall inspect and supervise the wor:k to be assured that the work is performed in accordance with contract requirements. The Contractor shall reject or stop portions of the work which are not in accordance with contract requirements. By requesting the Final Payment, each prime Contractor certifies that he has provided his work in compliance with the specifications and drawings. 1.08 CLEANING B.CE. F. B. C. D. The premises and the job site shall be maintained in a neat and orderly condition and kept free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish during the entire construction period, removing all crates, cartons and other flammable waste materials or trash from thJ working areas as required. The Contractor shall be responsible for the general cleaning and maintenance ofthe premises and the job and the coordination and direction of the clean- up of alt his Subcontractors. If the premises and jobsite are not maintained properly, lhe Owner may have any accumulations of waste materials or trash removed and charge the cost to the Contractor responsible therefore. If responsibility cannot be determined, the cost shall be prorated among, Contractors. Pipe and duct shafts, chases, funed spaces, and sinnilar spaces which are generally unfinished, shall be cleaned by each Contractor as he finishes;his work and left free from rubbish, loose plaster, mortar drippings, extraneous construction :materials, dirt and dust before preliminary inspection of the work. All areas of the building in which painting and finishing work is to be performed shall be cleaned throughout just prior to the start of this work, and these areas shall be maintained in satisfactory clean condition for painting and finish This cleaning shall include the removal of trash and rubbish from these areas; broom cleaninll of floors; the removal of any plaster, mortar, dust and other extraneous materials from all finish surfaces, including but not limited to, all exposed structural steel, miscellaneous metal, woodwork, plaster, masonry, concrete, mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, ductrvork, conduiLt, and also all surfaces visible after all permanent fixtures, grilles, registers, and such oth€rr fixtures or devices are in place. 1.09 DOCtIMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SrE The contractor shall maintain, at the site, for the owner, one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. These shall be available to the Architect. The Drawings, marked to record all changes made during construction shall be delivered to the Architect for the Owner upon completion of the work. ARCON 15095。2010000‐3GENERAL REQT]IREMENTS B. Permit drawings shall be maintained at the site in accordance with local requirements. I.IO ACCIDENTS AND SAFETY RESPONSIBILITY A. The general or prime confractor is solely responsible for supervision, monitoring, and maintaining safe working conditions on, in and around the construction site. The Archircct, his consultants and owner are not responsible for the safety conditions on the construction site. B. The Contractor shall rcport any and all accidents on the site or related to the project in nniting to his insurance company and to the Owner and Architect within 24 hours of occurrence. The report shall contain the following information: 1. Name and address of injured percon or penions; 2. Locationofoccurrence; 3. Date and time of occurrence; 4. Narrative description of the accident and how it occurred;5. Extent of injuries, hospital where treated name or names of physicians in attendance;6. Names of witnesses and, whenever possible, statements of witnesses and the name of person taking such statement; 7. SignatureofContactor'ssuperintendent. C. In addition, ifdeath or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be reported to the Architect, and to the Owner immediately by telephone or messenger. If any claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or any Subcontractor on account of any accident, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Architect giving full details of the claim. I.11 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. The Owner may employ and pay for an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection sampling and testing of, but not limited to: soils, concrete, masonry, steel, test and balance, and fireproofing. B' EmploSrment of testing laboratory will in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform work in accordance with the contract. C. Contractor shall cooperate with laboratory personnel and patch all surfaces and areas disturbed by testing operations. 1.12 COMPLETION A. The Contractor shall: l. Submit written certification, to Architect, that work is complete.2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected. B . The Architect will make an inspection within ten ( 10) working days after receipt of certification, together with Owner's Representative. C. Should Architect consider that work is complete: l. Contractor will prepare, and submit to Architect, a list of items to be completed or corected, as determined by the inspection.2. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Completion, containing: ARCON 15095。2010000‐4GENERAL REQUIREMENTS a. Proposed Date of Completion. b. contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified and amended by Architect. c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items.d. Time and date owner will assume possession of work or designated portion thereof. e. Responsibilities of Owner and Contractor for: Insurance Utilities Operation of mechanical, electrical and other systems Maintenance and cleaning Security f. Signatures of: i) Architect ii) Contractor iii) Owner 3. Owner occupancy ofProject or Designated Portion ofproject: a. Contractor shall: i) Obtain certificate of occupancy ii) Perform final cleaning in accordance with article "Cleaning',. b. owner will occupy project, under provisions in certificate of completion. 4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time. Should Architect consider that work is not complete: l. He shall notify the Contractor stating the reasons.2. Contractor: Complete work, and send second written notice to Architect certifying that designated portion of Project is complete.3. Architect and Owner's Representative will reinspect work. 1.13 WARRANTY PERIOD FORALLWORK A. There is a TWO YEAR warranty period from the date of Completion as a minimum. The warranty period and provisions may be extended in other sections of the Project Manual. The Contractor agrees to repair and replace all defective work including all laboi and materials for the warranty period. The Contractor agrees to perform the corrective work withinfive (S) days of receiving natice from the Architect or Owner. Emergency conditions shal require the Conftactor to perform corrective work within two (2) days. The Architect and Owner shall determine if the corrective work is part of the warranty. Their decision is binding. If the warranty work is not completed expeditiously as determined by the Owner and Architect, the Owner reserves the right to have the corrective work completed as well as any professional fees and the Contractor agrees he is liable for all costs within thirty (30) days of notice. After that date 1.5Vo interest per month shall be applied to the cost. The Contractor's bonds shall remain in effect for the warranty period. 1.14 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS D. A. ARCON 15095。2Throughout the progress of construction, the Contractor or Subcontractor for each major trade 010000‐5GENERAL REQUIRElИ ENTS category (mechanical, electrical, elevators, etc.) shall keep a current, detailed, record ofall changes in the installation of his own work from the conditions, locations and layout shown on the Contract Drawings and/or Shop Drawings. This requirements does not authorize any deviations without approval of the Owner and Architect. B. These Record Drawings shall be readily available to the Architect. The drawings, marked to record all changes made during construction, shall be delivered to him for the Owner upon completion of the work. All changes shall be marked on drawings and turned over to the Architect. C. Suitable prints for record drawings used shall be established by the Cohtractor at start of construction. The Contractor shall maintain the prints in good condition and shall use colored pencils to mark up the prints in a legible manner to show: 1. All significant changes in schedules, plans, sections, elevations and details, such as shifts in location of walls, doors, windows, stairs and the like made during construction.2. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and knockout panels made during construction.3. Final location ofelectric panels, final arrangement ofelectric circuits and any sigrrificant changes made in electrical design as a result ofChange Orders orjob conditions.4. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and major concealed mechanical work items including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, vent stacks, drainage lines, control and shutoffvalves, dampers, diverters.5. Final location and arrangement of all connections and./or re-routing of existing utilities, including, but not limited to, sanitary, storm, heating, electric, gur, *ut". andLlephone. Show invert elevations of sewers and top of water lines.6. All the above information shall be transferred to set of drawings in PDF format by the Contractor. The PDF set shall be provided by the Contractor.7. Shop Drawings other than for ductwork will not be acceptable as Project Record Drawings. D' When all revisions showing work as finally installed are made, the Record Drawings Set shall be delivered to the Architect before final payment is made. 1.I5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall {urange to instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper operation, Iubrication and maintenance of equipment. B. The Contractor shall fumish a written, narrative, description of the design and function intended for all service-connected equipment and systems, including descriptions ofthe normal operation characteristics and range of capabilities, plus single-line diagram when required for clarity. After approval by the Architect, the Contractor shall bind these in the Maintenance-Operation Manual. C. The Contractor shall provide 1 copy of the Maintenance-Operation Manual in PDF format, reflecting and incorporating the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Shop Drawings as finally approved. Performance curves for pumps, fans, compressors, and the like. Description of materials and methods for lubrication Wiring and control diagrams. Start-up, operation and shut-down instructions. Servicing and cleaning instructions. Preventive maintenance and repair procedures. Parts lists and source. ARCON 15095.2 010000‐6GENERAL REQT]IREMENTS D. Each manual shalt be include a cover sheet with title and index or table of contents page. 1.16 FINALINSPECTION A. Contactor shall submit written certification that: Conract documents have been reviewed. Portion of project for which he is responsible has been inspected for compliance with contact documents. Work has been completed in accordance with conract documents. F4uipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's Representative and are operational. Project is completed and ready for final inspection with all punch list items completed. B. Architect will make final inspection within ten (10) days after receipt of certification, with Owner's Representative. C. Should Architect consider that work is finally complete in accordance with requirements of contract documents, he will request Contractor to make project closeout submittals. D. Should Architect consider that work is not finally complete: 1. He shall notify the Contractor and stat€ reasons.2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send second written notice certi$ing that work is complete.3. Architect will reinspect woTk.REINSpECTION COSTS E. Should Architect be required to perform additional inspections because of failure of work to comply with original certifications of Contractor, Contractor will compensate Architect for additional services. Confiactor shall pay Architect same hourly rate as shown in paragraph 15 of the Instructions to Bidders in the Project Manual. 1.17 CLOSEOT.]TSUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Project Record Documents and Record Drawings.2. Operation and Maintenance Data. 3. Guarantees and Bonds, if specified. 4. Keys and Keying Schedule, if applicable.5. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials, if specified.6. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. '7 . Evidence of compliance with requirements of goveming authorities: a. Certificates of Inspection: i) Mechanical and Plumbing equipment. ii) Electrical equipment. iii) Fire Protection systems. b. Contractor shall furnish written certification that materials furnished on project meet all requirements of the occupational Safety and Health Act. They shull ulro furnish written certifications that all materials comply with the requirements of the current NFPA #102 and NFpA #101, code for safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures (Life Safety Code). ARCON 15095.2 010000‐7GEMRAL REQUIREMENTS 8. l,etter from each Contractor and Prime Contractor certi$ing that no asbestos-containing products were used in this project. 9. Consent ofSurety. 10. Balancing Reports. 11. Warranties. B. Project Record Drawings, Record Documents, Certifications, and Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Architect in pdf format for review to confirm that all required documents have been provided by Contractor. I . Upon review of documents by Architect, ConEactor shall submit all Record Drawings, Record Documents, Certifications, and Operation and Maintenance Manuals to BHFX for"Interactive Project Closeout". Cost for "Interactive Project Closeout" shall be included in Contractor's bid. 1.18 FINALDOCTIMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit final statement of accounting to Architect, B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments. 1. Original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders. b. Cash Allowances. c. Other adjustments. d. Deductions for uncorrected work.e. Deductions for liquidated damages.f. Deductions for Reinspection Payments. 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due. C. Architect will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum notpreviously made by Change Orders. 1.19 FINALAPPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Contractor shall submit final application in accordance with provisions of General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditi,ons and as amended by the Instructions to Bidders in the project Manual. 1.20 FINAL CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT A. Architect will issue final certificate in accordance with provisions of General Conditions. 1.21 DEFINTIIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in theConditions of the Contract. ARCON 1509s.2 01 00 00-8 6ENERAL REeUIREMENTS C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the samJ meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,,, "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated.u - E. "Regulations": l,aws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities havingjurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction indusEry that confrol perforrnance of the Work. F. "Fumish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishiing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, inctuaing installation, erection, application, and simitar operations. J. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must beperformed by accredited or unionized individuals ofa corresponding generic name, such as"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply ixclusively to tradespeopleof the corresponding generic name. K. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authoritles havingjurisdiction. L. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of project siteis shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on whichProject is to be built. 1.22 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force ;d effect as ifbound or copied directly into the Contact Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unlessotherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Rggyirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requiremerts tfrat are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceedin!. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality lrvels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified ARCON 15095.2 010000‐9GENERAL REQIIIREMENTS PART 2 PART 3 shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed ttre minimum wittrin reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with indusuy standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies ofapplicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request. E. krdustry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Conract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." F. Symbols: Where symbols are not defined within Contract Documents, they shall represent items adopted by the American Institute of Architects (AIA) and the American National Stuna*a, Institute (ANSI). PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION (NOTUSED) END OF SEC■ON 01 00 00 ARCON 15095。2010000・ 10 GENERAL REQlyIREMENTS SECTION 01 23 CICl ALTERNATES PART l GENERAL l.01 RELATED DOCIJMENTSA&柵 l認 f艦協r:I税盤柵 L躍蹴祓 _Lmen0 1.02 StlMMARY A. This section includes administrative and procedural requrements goveming altemates. 1.03 DEFIMIONS A. Deflnition:An altemate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated On the Bid Form fbr certain work deflned in the Bidding Requrements that may be added to or deducted iOm the Base Bid alnountifthe O、vner decides to accept a coresponding change in elther the an10unt Of consmctiOn to be completed,or in the products,Inaterials,equipment,system,or installation methods descnbed in the Contract Documents. B. The cOst Or credit for each altemate is the net addidon to or deducuon hm the contract Sum tO incorporate the altemate into dle work,No other adiuStments are made tO the Contract sum. 1.04 PROCEDlyRES A.C00rdination:Moditt Or adiuSt affected adiaCent work as necesstt tO COmpletely and mlly integrate that work into the proJ∝t. B. Include as part of each Jtemate,miscellaneous devices,accessory O、ects,and si面 lar itenls incidental to or required ibr a complete installation whether or not mentiOned as part of the altemate. C. Execute accepted altemates under the salne conditions as other work Of this cOntract. D. Schedule:A∥Schedule of Altemates“is included at l■〕end of this sectiOn.SPccincation sections referenced in the schedule contain requrements for matedals necessa=y tO achieve the work desc五 bed under each altemate. PART 2 PRODUCTS(NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 EXECUT10N 3.01 SCHEDllLE OF ALTERNATES A. ALTEttATE NO.1:Π oOHngin Bunk Room 上 :IIIf譜 :認 1:』1精胤f11:Il∫jI:11讐』:lilif増 1駅 ::』::fI』:∥「 B. ALTERNATE NO.2:FlooHng wOrk 上柵柵 11成 °1,:孵獅鵡:11‰智1琥』11留:illI冊 ARCON 15095.2 012300‐l ALTERNAmS specified herein. C. ALTERNATE NO. 3: Casework 1. Provide the additional cost to provide and install new casework in the bunk room 103. This includes Units A, B and C and finished wood base units for a complete installation. END OF SECTION 01 23 OO ARCON 15095。2012300‐2ALTERNATES SEC■ON 01 33 00 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES PART l GENERAL l.01 SllMMARY A.出ゞi::Ⅷ『鋼Ⅷ::却:』邸棚1肥 :諄織腑ub面饉ng ShOp B. Related S∝tions include the following: 1. Drawings and general provisiOns ofthe Contract including General and Supplementary COnditions and otherl)ivision 01 Specincation sections,apply 、 to this Section. 1.02 CONFLICTS In the event of any conflict between the provisions hereof and the provisions ofthe General and Supplementary Conditions, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. 1.03 ELECTRONIC SUBttAL PROCEDURES The following types of submittals shall be transmitted elecfionically as outlined in this section. 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Manufacturer'sinstallationinstructions. 4. Specified product list Electronically transmit each submittal to the Architect as follows: 1. Submittals shall include an electronic letter of transmittal2. Electronic submittals shall be made only in pDF format.3. Electronic submittals shall be reviewed and returned in pDF format4. Electronic submittal file names shall be easily understood and shall include relevant numeric reference (e.g. cSI Section Number) and naming conventions.5. Submitted using ARCON's Newforma website 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA A. B. A.Each Contractor shall prepare a schedule of specific target dates for the submission andretum of shop drawings, product data and samples required by the contract Documents. The Schedule shall be divided into construction categories. All shop drawings andproduct data for interrelated items shall be scheduled for submission at the same time.The Shop Drawing Submittal schedule, submitted by the Contractor, shall provide theArchitect with at least 15 calendar days from the date the Architect receives a submittal,until the date the submittal is required to be mailed back to the contractor. All shop drawings, product data and samples shall bear the following identification:B. SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES, PRODUCT DATA ARCON 15095。2013300…1 C. 1. Date of Submittal. 2. Submittal Number. 3. Tifle of Project. 4. Name of Contractor and date of his approval.5. Name of subcontractor or supplier and date of submittal to contractor. 9. Reference to Specification section and paragraph and/or Drawing Number(s).7. The specific location ofthe work covered.8' Any qualification, departure or deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9. Any additional information required by the Specification for the particular material. "Shop Drawings" include fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules, descriptive literature, catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams; all othir drawings and descriptive data pertaining to materials, equipment, piping, duct and conduit systemi, and methods of construction as may be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the position thereof conform to the contract requirementr. St op Drawings shall be of sufficient detail to indicate all conflicts with other Subcontractors. 1. NorE: Reproduction of drawings by any photographic, xerographic or other similar technique or process, for incorporating the material containea into a shop drawing, is strictly prohibited. 2. Architect will fumish at contractor's request cAD Base Drawings for use in developing shop drawings a- Contractor shall be required to sign CAD waiver provided by Architect.b. Confiactor shall be charged handling fee of g250 per sheet payable to Architect. 3. CAD Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad 2004 only. Drawings shall include only doors, walls, windows, and room numbers. "Product Data" are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instruction, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of the Work. All material, equipment, etc., indicated on the shop drawings and product data submitted as furnished by another Subcontractor shall be so stated with the rispective Subcontractor's name or section of work. Under no circumstances will the term',By Otlers" be permitted on the shop drawings. The Contractor shall submit all required shop drawings and product data as received from each Subcontractor, in accordance with the approved schedules, and in any event, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work'or in that of any other Contractor or subcontractor. The Architect shall, within 15 calendar days, or such longerperiod as may under the circumstances be reasonable, review shop drawings and product data. 1. concurrent Review: where concurrent review of submittal by architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required allow 21 Calender days for initialreview. Items requiring concurrent review: Doors, frames, and hardware. Elevators. Masonry. Louvers. Mechanical equipment curbs. 01 33 00 -2 SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES, PRODUCT DATA D.EF. ARCON 15095。2 G. f. Precast Concrete. g. Architectural items containing electrically operated components Prior to submission, the Contractor shall thoroughly check all shop drawings and product data as to measurements, size of members, materials and all other details to satisfy himself that they conform to the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. By approving and submitting shop drawings and product data, the confiactor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, construction criteria, materials, and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the work and of the contract Documents. If the shop drawings or product data show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Confractor shall make specific mention of such variation in his submittal letter. Any such variations are subject to review by the Architect. The Architect shall review shop drawings or product data only for conformance with desigl intent of the project. The Architect's review will not be construed as: 1. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;2. Relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for any error in details, dimensions or otherwise that may exist. 3. Accepted departures from additional details or instructions previously furnished by the Architect, unless the Architect has specifically accepted the variation in accordance with the thirteenth paragraph of this article. Subcontractors shall submit to the Architect through the Conhactor; four prints of each drawing, including fabrication, erection, layout and setting drawings, and such other drawings as required under the various sections ofthe specifications; four copies of manufacturers'descriptive data for materials, equipment and fixtures, including catalog sheets, showing dimensions, performance characteristics and capacities, wiring diagrams and controls, schedules, installation instructions and other pertinent information as required; all in accordance with the second paragraph ofthis article. shop drawings and product data with no corrections will be stamped -coNFoRMS WTTH DESIGN CONCEPT", and those requiring only minor corrections will be stamped'NorE MARKINGS". Those stamped .coNFoRMs wrrH DESIGN coNCEpr" can be used for ordering, fabrication and erection. Those stamped "NorE MARKINGS" can also be used for ordering, fabrication, and erection, but the original drawings must be corrected and new fiansparencies submitted for final acceptance. If drawings resubmitted for final acceptance have changes other than those previously noted, such changes must be identified and explained in the letter of transmittal by which the drawings are submitted. If major corrections are required, the Architect will return the sepia transparency stamped"RESUBMIT". The contractor shall correct the original drawing as reqiired and then submit new documents to the Architect for approval. The Architect wili review the corrected shop drawing and retum sepia transparency to the Contractor until final approval has been given. Shop drawings which do not have the Architect's signature and stamp .coNFoRMS wrrH DESIGN CONCEPT., or "NOTE MARKINGS" shall not bJpermitted at the site,At least one (1) complete set of shop drawings bearing the Architect's stamp shall be kept at the site, in the Contractor's field office, for reference at all times. SHOP DRAWINCS,SAヽ lPLES,PRODUCT DATA H. K. L. M. ARCON 15095.2 N. 013300‐3 0. No work in the shop or ield shall be started until the Architect has approved the shOp drawings and samples ibr that segment ofthe work,nor shall wOrk be done l10m any shop drawings not bearing the Architecrs stamp of approval. 1.05 SAMPLES A. B. "Samples" are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. The contractor shall submit to Architect, samples of all materials, equipment" fixtures, appliances and other fittings, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other contractor or Subcontractor and in accordance with the approved schedules. The Architect shall, within 15 calendar days or such longer period as may be reasonable, check such samples, but only for conformance with the design concept ofthe project. The Architect's determination shall be final and binding. unless otherwise required in the Specifications, three (3) samples of suf6cient size to indicate general visual effect shall be submitted to the Architect. Where samples must show a range ofcolor, texture, finish, graining, or other similar property, submit three (3) sets of pairs illustrating the full scope of this range. one set of ',coNFoRMs wrrH DESIGN CONCEPT" samples shall be retained at the construction Manager's field office. Samples shall bear the identification specified above in this section. Samples will be accepted by Architect only if all delivery charges are prepaid. C. D. PART 2 PART 3 PRODUCIIS(Not used) EXECU■ON(Not used) END OF SEC■ON 01 33 00 SHOP DRAWINGS,SAMPLES, PRODUCT DATA ARCON 15095。2013300‐4 PART l l.01 1.02 SECTION 02 4tt9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION GEIYERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Demolition requires the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of the following: 1. Existing flooring as shown 2. Existing partial height partitions, complete. 3. All existing Casework ( loose and Bult-in) B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 0l specification Sections, apply to *ris Section.2. Division 0l Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction, protection facilities, and environmental-protection measures for building demolition operations. 3. Division 0l Section "selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings, structues, and site improvements. 4. Division 23 Sections for demolishing or relocating site mechanical items.5' Division 26 Sections for demolishing or relocating site electrical items.6. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements not part of building demolition.7. Division 33 for demolishing or relocating site utilities. SUBMITTALS A. Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Architect for review prior to start of work. Inciude coordination for shut-off, capping and continuation ofutility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. 1 . Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure unintemrpted progress of Owner's on-site operations. 2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Notices: Prior to start of demolition, provide all notices and obtain all permits required by authorities having jurisdiction. In the event of failure to provide required notice or permiis, pay penalties assessed, including any penalties assessed against the Owner, the Architect, or other parties. B. Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition in manner that will minimirc need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's normal operations. C. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be demolished. ARCON 15095。2024119‐1SELECTIVE DERIOLITION D. l. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner in so far as practicable. However, variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition woik. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed, but of salvable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. l. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. Protections; Provide temporary barricades and other forrns ofprotection required to protect owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. 1.Provide protective measures required to provide free and safe passage of owner's personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of building. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities havingiurisaictlon. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. Protect floors with suitable coverings when'necessary. Construct temporary insulated solid dusproof partitions where required to separate areas where noisy, dirty or dusty operations are performed. Equip partiti-ons with dusproof doors and security locks if required. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces, and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas ofexisting building. Remove protections at completion of work. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations at no cost to Owner, Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior ofducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during fl ame-cutting operations. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not intemrpt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during intemrptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.2. Maintain sprinkler service at all times during selective demolition. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methodsto limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 4. 7. F. G. H. ARCON 15095.2 024119‐2SELECTIVE DEMOLIT10N l. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. K. Extermination: Employ a certified exterminator and treat areas of building indicated in accordance with governing health regulations for rodent and insect control. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to corlmencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Photograph existing conditions of structure, surfaces, equipment or to surrounding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition. File with Architect prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 1. Cease operations and notifu Architect immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. B. Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed. C. Erect and maintain dust-proof partitions and closures required to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. I . Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust-proof partitions of minimum 4 inch soas, sla inch drywall (oints taped) on occupied side, ll2 inch fre-retardant plywood on demolition side, and fill partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation.2. Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. D' Locate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services not indicated to remain. 1. Provide by-pass connections necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to owner if shut-down of service is necessary during change-over. 3.03 DEMOLITION A. Perform selective demolition in a systematic manner. Use methods required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1- Sawcut and demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools.2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors or framing.3. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction. ARCON 15095。2024119‐3SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 4. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible. B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended function or design are encounterei, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, reuurange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay. 3.M UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHAMCAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems intemrptions specified in Division 01. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated ufility services and mechanicaVelectrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1 Contractor shall anange to shut off indicated serviceVsystems.2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.3. Ifservices/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary serviceVsystems that bypass area of selective demolition and tlat maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fue-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or ltug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be remov{ and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. C. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Floor slabs may contain pipng or conduit systems. This Contractor is responsible for taking any measures required to ensure no conduits or other services are iamaged. This includes but is not limited to x-ray or similar non-destructive me.u:ls.6. Cut off exterior pipe a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion ofpipe or conduit after bypassing. 7 . Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving portion(s) of building to be demolished.8. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations ofauthorities havingjurisdiction. 3.08 SALVAGE MATERIALS ARCON 15095.2 024119‐4SELECTⅣE DEDIOLIT10N Salvage Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "salvage-Deliver to Owner", carefully remove indicated items, clean, store and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt. 1. Historic artifacts, including comerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other articles of historic significance remain the property of the Owner. Notify Architect if such items are encountered and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal and salvage for Owner. 3.09 DISPOSALOFDEMOLISIIED MATERIALS A' Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site. I' If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances conceming removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution.2. Burning of removed materials in not be permitted on site. 3.IO CI-EAN.UP AND REPAIR Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. Repair demolition performed in excess ofthat required. Retum adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SEC■ON 041 19 A. B. ARCON 15095.2 024119‐5SELECTⅣE DEMOLIT10N SEC■ON 06 104Xl ROUGE CARPEttY PART l GENERAL l.01 StJMMARY A. This section includes the following: 1. W00d b10cking and nailers. 2. W00d hndng and sleepers. 3. Plywood backing panels. 1.02 DEFINIT10NS A. Rough Carpenty: Carpenty work■ot specined in other SectiOns and nOt exposed,unless otherwlse indicated. Bo Lumber grading agencies,and the abbre宙 ations used to reference dlem,include the f0110wing: 1. NELMA―Normeastem Lu壷 ber Manufacturers Association.2. NLGA‐Nattonal Lu面 ber Crades Au■ority. 3. RIS―Redwood lnspection Service. 4. SPコ B―Southem Pine lnspectiOn Bureau. 5, WCIIR―West Coast Lumberlnsp∝tion Bureau.6. WWPA―Westem W00d Products Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Produd Dtta Fore“h tte dpЮ C:1篤 l器淵F導躍闊‰rdCatecomponemmatenals and dimensions and include B. Material Certiflcatett For dimension lumber specined to comply with minimum a110wable unit smsstt hacacspecLsmdgradesl:観潟盤 IttTd“豆gn v」ues ttproved by tte American Lumber Standards Comlmt C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the fb1lowing,showing compliance with building cOde in ettct for Lttect l. Power―d五 ven fasteners. 2. POwder‐actuated fasteners. 3. ExPans10n anchors. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber,plywoOd,and other panels;place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under covenngs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 W00D PRODUCTS,GENERAL A hmb∝DOC PS 20田 d apphable群糧 ;FhTttgmangttenci∝Certind by me AmeHcm Lumber standards Conlmttee Board( ARCON 15095.2 o61000‐l ROUGH CARPENTRY l. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliancr issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal(38-mm) actual thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSIONLUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Douglas firJarch; WCLIB orWWPA. 2. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. 3. Douglas tularch (north);NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCrrB orWWPA. 5. Hem-tu (north); NLGA. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LIJMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Cants. 3. Nailers. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-flu (south) or Spruce-pine-fir;NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, orWWpA. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with l5 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fu or Hem-fu (north), 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WW?A.3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir,2 Common grade; MLN{r{, NLGA, WCLIB, orWWPA. 2.04 PLYWOOD BACKINGPANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS l, Exposure l, C-D plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 112 inch( 1 -.1 mm) thick. ARCON 15095。2061000‐2ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.05 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. L:iT#ffi H;lH;:?":.rj,Jlffi *:1,Tfl"J1""",i#1#il'#aff '* ASTM A I53lA 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws; ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 2,06 MSCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required. B. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 349g that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.OI INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, sleepers, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quatity of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number ofjoints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the International Building Code. D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. 3,02 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. ARCON 15095。2061000¨3ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Attach items to subsftates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. 3.03 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A' Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, witl wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 3.04 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Do not splice structural members between supports. 3.05 WOOD STRUCTTIRAL PANELINSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. 830K, ',ApA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.2. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: a. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.b. Tabte2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the International Building Code unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings. 3.06 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Remove excess material or waste that cannot be used, as described above, and legally dispose ofoff Owner's property. END OF SECTION 06 10 OO ARCON 15095。2061000‐4ROUGH CARPENTRY SECT10N 06 40 00 mttERIOR ARCⅡHECmL W00DWORK PART l GENERAL l.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes the fbllowing: 1. hterior Wood Trim B. Related Sections include the following: 上 :悧 l:漑 ∫3瑠謂 1露 ff』ll:1111:缶珊猟][tiξ llllド叩plemm町2群 :乳階器緊躙調器鳥器脚蹴FttLttR肥器 woodwork installadon. 1.02 DEFIM10NS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging sfips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork- installation. 1.03 StIBttALS Product Data: For each type ofprocess and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative fieatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's wriffen instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range ofcolors, textures, and patterns available for each type ofmaterial indicated. 1. Plastic laminates. D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates; AWI Quality Certification program certificates. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. INTERIoR ARCHITECTURAL W00DWORK B. C. ARCON 15095。2064000‐1 B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork. D. Performance shall be in accordance with Custom Grade of the Woodwork Institute ..Manual of Millwork", latest edition. I . If provisions for the Grade specified are in conflict with, or modified by the drawings and/or specifications, the modifications shall govern. E. Contractors and their personnel engaged in the work shall be able to demonstrate successful experience with work of comparable extent, complexity and quality to that shown and specified. l. Fabricator shall be a memberflicensee in good standing of the Woodwork Institute.2. Installer shall be a member/licensee in good standing of the Woodwork Institute. 1.05 DELTVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions " Article. 1.06 PROJECTCONDMONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperatuie and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. I,O7 COORDINATION A. CoOrdinate sizes and locations of taming,blocking,hring,reinfOrcements,and odler related units ofWOrk specifled in other Sections tO ensure thatinterior architectural woOdwOrk can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ヽ色へTIIこレ咽LS A. General:Provide materials that comply宙 th requirements ofthe WIc quality standard fOr each type of w00dwork and quality grade specined,unless otherwise indicated. Bo W00d characte五 stics: INTERIOR ARCmTECTURAL W00DWORK ARCON 15095。20`4000‐2 1. Maximuln Moisture Content for Lumber:7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent fOr softwood. 2. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1,cither venecr core or particle core,unless Otherwise indicated. 3. Sonw。。d Plywood:DOC PSl. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1,M‐2‐Exterior Gluc. 5. Medium‐Density Fiberboard:Medium‐Density Fiberboard:ANSI A208.2,Grade MD―ExteHor Gluc. 6. Hardboard:AHA A135,4,Class l Tempered. 7. Low emitting core: ao NAllF M-2 Particleboard i) For casework having recycled content ii) For casework being manufactured宙 thoutthe use of urea fomaldehyde. lil) For pЮ ducts ha宙 ng chain ofcustody∝rtiicates certi～ing thatthe wood used in the casework complies宙 th FSC requirements. b. NAIIF Plywood i) PlyW00d that meets or exceeds the standards set fO価 by APA for structral use panels il) For casework being manufactured withoutthe use Ofurea fomaldchyde. ili) For producs having chain of custody certincates certi″ing thatthe wood used in the casework complies with FSC requirements. 2.02 1N「ERIOR W00D l■田Ⅵ A. Sotwood Lumber Trim for Opaque FiШ sh(Stain or Clear Fhsh):Kiln―dried inished lumber (S4S)ofone Ofhe follo宙 ng species and grade額 1. Eastern white pine,sugar pine,or westem white pine;NLGA,WCLIB,or wwPA.. B. Hardwood Lumber THm for Transparent Finish(Stain Or clear Finish):clear,kiln―dried,red oak A」shed lumber(S4S),plain sawn or sliced. C. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood:DOC PSl,A‐D hte五 or,thickness as indicated but notless than 1/2 inch. 2.03 FASTENERS A ttFi織 ∬鰍臨:辞翼織棚翼為:驚繁lⅧi臆 :T∬袢a walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed―steel o■lead expansion sleeves for drilled‐in―place anchOrs. B. Hardboard Paneling Anchors: 1. Concrete Machine Screw Anchor cxpanSiOn Anchory 2. G.S.A.Specincations FF―S-325,Group I,Type l,Class l. 3. #10x l‐1/2"(面 n)Round head zinc plated C. MDF Adhesive l. Water based latex adhesive,low VOC,catidge paneling adhesive. ARCON 15095。2 o640 Cltl‐3 1NTERIOR ARCHITECttRAL W00DWORK PART 3 EXECUTION 3.OI PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for Epe of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). C' Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to subsffates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 3.03 ADruSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECT10N 0640 00 INTERIoR ARCH1lEcttRAL W00DWORK ARCON 15095。2064000‐4 SECHON 419 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEDIBLIES PART l GENERAL l.01 St7MMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Non‐load―bearing steel■aming. Bo Related Sections include the followilng: 上 [:需::l認 f翌霧|∬評1識胤掘:Ⅷ庶蹴lli漁電穏Fupメ eme岬 1.02 DEFINrrIONS A. Gypsum BOard Temin010gy: Referto ASTM C ll for deflnitions of tenns fOr gypsum bOard assemblies not deined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.03 SUBMI宵ノLs A. Product Data:For each type ofpЮ duct indicated. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA鷲鮮燃榊 iⅢ鱗脚鞘燃榊亀 1. Fire―Resistance―Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designatiOns ttom llL's"Fire Reslstance Directoryr3爵職li職撤熙穐侵:脚騰輔職 ]i盤∥y・ 1. STC‐Rated Assemblies:Indicated by design designatiOns iom GA‐600,"Fire Resistance Design Manual." 1.05 DELrVERY,STORAGE,AND IIANDLING A. Deliver materials in origind packaLCS,Containers,or bundles bearing brand name and identiflcation of lnanufacturer or supplier.B掛癬騨露螺 I枷器認,M柵鼈 c― lgglng. 1.06 PROJECT CoNDITIONS A. Environlnental Li面 tations: COmply with ASTM C 840 requrements Or gypsum bOard manufacturer's wntten reconlmendations,whichever are more stnngent. ARCON 15095。2 092116‐l GYPSIIM BoARD ASSEMBLIES PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.OI MANI]FACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: l. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc.c. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.f. National Gypsum Company.g. Scafco Corporation. h. Unimast, Inc. i. Western Metal l,ath & Steel Framing Systems. 2. Gypsum Board and Related products: a. American Gypsum Co. b. Certainteed c. Georgia Pacific Glpsum LLCd. National Gypsum Company. e. Trim-tex f. United States Gypsum Co. 2,02 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AI{D SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 64ll{ 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch (1.59 mm) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch ( 1 .21 mm) diameter wire. C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to AsrM E 4gg by aqualified independent testing agency. a. Type; Postinstalled, expansion anchor. D. Hangers: As follows: l. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 64llA 641M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 inch(4.12 mm) diameter. E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.053ginch (1.37 mm), a minimum l/2inch (12.7 mm) wide flange, with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. 1. Steet Studs: ASTM C645. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)b, Depth: 3-518 inches ARCON 15095.2 092116_2 cypsuM BOARD ASSEMBLIES F. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C635, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. l- Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall.b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Funing 640 System.c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System. 2.03 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: 1 . Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.7 mm).2. Depth: 3-518 inches (92.1 mm) C. Proprietary Deflection Track Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection oi skucture above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1 . Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Delta star, Inc., Superior Metal rrim; Superior Flex Track System (sFT).b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track.c. Dietrich Metal Framing; Slotted SLP-TRK. D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, thJfo[owing:2. Product Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the filtowing: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.c. Dietrich Metal Framing; Slotted SLP-TRK. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: O.O3l2 inch (0.79 mm). F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum l/2inch (12.7 mm) wide flange. 1. Depth: 1-ll2 inches (39.1 mm).2- Clip Angle: 1-ll2 by 1-lt2 inch (38.1 by 38. 1 mm), 0.068-inch ( 1 .73mm) thick, galvanized steel. G. Furring Channels (Funing Members): Commercial-steel sheet with TASTM A 653/A 653M,hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. ARCON 15095.2 092116-3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLTES 1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Funing Channels: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).b. Depth: 1-ll2 inches (38.1 mm). 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).b. Depth: l-5/8 inches (41.3 mm) 3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, comrgated-edge tne of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).4. Tie Wire: ASTM AilllL64lM, Class I zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 inch (1.59 mm) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 inch ( 1.21 mm) diameter wire. I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.04 INTERIOR G\?SUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lenglhs and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. GypsumWallboard: ASTMC36andASMCt396. l. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).b. IongEdges: Tapered. c. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C lM7. l. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Comerbead: Use at outside comers.b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. c. Expansion (Control) Joinl Use where indicated.d. curved-Edge cornerbead: with notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. B. Aluminum or Plastic Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. MM Systems Corporation. d. Pittcon Industries. ARCON 1s09s.2 09 2t t6-4 cypsut{ BOARD ASSEMBLIES e. THm_tex 2.06 JOM TREATヽ便Nぼ MATERIALS A.General:Comply with ASTM C 474. B. Joint Tape: 1.Interior Gypsum Wallboard:Paper or Fiberglass Tapc Nomina1 2 inches宙 de self adhedng tape 2. Cementitious Backer Units:Alkali―resistant Fiberglass Tape: No面 na1 2 inches宙 de polper coated alkali_resistant inesh tape. C. Joint Compound for hterior Gypsum Wallboard:For each coat use fOmulation dlatis compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive cOats and with gypsum board type. 1. Embedding and First Coat:For embedding tape and ttst cOat onjoints,fasteners,and trim nanges,use drying―type,all―purpose compound. a. Use setting―type compOund for installing paper‐faced metal tim accessO五 es. 2. Fin Coat:For s∝ond coat,usc arying_type,a11-purpose compOund. 3. Finish Coat:For third coat,use setting―type,sandable topping cOmpound. Do JOint Compound for Tlle Backing Panels:Asr∝ommended by manufacmrer. 2.07 AUXILIARYル Lへ霊RIALS A. Ceneral:PrO宙 de auxlliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer:s wntten reconlmendat10ns. B. LaminatinL Adhesive: Adhesive orjoint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels tO cOntinuous substrate. C. Steel D五 H Screws:AS¶M C 1002,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panelstO steel members hm O.033 to O.112 inch(0.84 to 2.84 nlm)thiCk. D. Isolation Strip at ExteHor Wallま 1. Asphalt_saturated Organic Felt ASTM D 226,Type I(No.15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foaln Gasket: Adhesive‐backed,closed―cen vinyl foarn smps that a1low fastener penetratiOn宙 thout foam displacement,1ノ 8 inch(3.2mm)thiCk,in宙 dth to suit steel stud slze. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets:See l)ivision 07 Section``Insulation'' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINAT10NA聯驚椰 1鸞 1椰憮織 ∬霧鰈猟艦胤器 installation only after unsatisfactOry conditions have been ARCON 15095。2 09211`‐5 GYPSIIM BoARD ASSEMBLIES corTected, 3.02 PREPARATION A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and otler provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support "iitingtand that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Fumish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (Eacks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than24 inches (600 mm) o.c.2' After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards; ASTM C754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, ioilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United Statis Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure2- Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor.3. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides ofjoints independently. 3.04 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING SOFFIT FRAMING A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and frer from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension iystem. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting holzontal iorces Uy bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to rupport standard ARCON 15095。2092116‐6GYPSUM BoARD ASSEMBLIES suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. secure rod or angle hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for skucture and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. a. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. b. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.c. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within l/8 inch h 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member and fiansversely between parallel members. C. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangen used for support. D. Wire-tie funing channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated. E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. unless more stringent spacing is indicated on drawings. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. unless more stringent spacing is indicated on drawings. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless more stringent spacing is indicated on drawings. F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3.05 INSTALLING STEELPARTITION AND SOTTTT FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. l. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt or foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 112 inch ( l3 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief.2. For fre-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of 4. ARCON 15095。2092116‐7GYPSllM BoARD ASSEMBLIES floor/roofslabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structue. a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. D. Install steel studs and funing at the following spacings: 1. Single-Iayer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.2. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end ofeach panel an be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges fusL F' Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with g)psum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamU anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure tojamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.2. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.06 APPLYING FIMSHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting endjoints in the central area ofeach ceiling. Stagger abuttingindjoints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D' Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than l/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and endjoints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. bo not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end ofeach panel is attached to open(unsupported) edges of stud flanges fust. G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. H. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ARCON 1509s.2 09 2t 16-8 cypSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsumpanels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside offloor/roofslabs and decks, cut gypsumpanels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other sffuctural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8 inch (6.4 to 9.5 mm) wide joints to install sealant. I. Isolate perimeter ofnonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 114 to 112 inch (6.4 to 12.7 mm) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edgis and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead ofacoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1 . Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for veftical applications. 3.07 PANELAPPLICATIONMETHODS A. Single-Iayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before walVpartition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.2. On partitions/walls, apply g)?sum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fue-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. B. Multilayer Application on PartitionsAValls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud oi n 11ing member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Staggerjoints on opposite sides of partitions. C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. ARCON 15095。2092116‐9GYPSUM BoARD ASSEMBLIES 3.08 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufdcrurer's written instructions. B' Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.09 FIMSHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat g)psum board joints, interior angles, edge trir4 control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare glpsumboard surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill openjoints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Applyjoint tape over gypsum boardjoints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D' Gypsum Board Finish lrvels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840; for locations indicated: l. kvel l: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level offinish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. l,evel 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats ofjoint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FmLD QUALITY CONTROL A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation.2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings: a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation.b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.c. Installation of air-duct systems. d. Installation of air devices. e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing.f. Installation of ceiling support framing. END OF SECTION 09 2116 ARCON 15095.2 092116‐10 GYPSIIM BoARD ASSEⅣ【BLIES SECIIC)N095000 CEILINGS PART l GENERAL l.01 StlMMARY A・ Extent of each type acOustical ceilng is indicated on drawings and/Or drawing schedules. B. This Section includes the fbllowing: 1. Patcljng of e対 sting suspended ceiling systeln. C. Related Sections include the fbHowing: 上 :F通遺:漑 fζ 醤鷺1謂 1:覇 12∬よユ譜1∬驚l理呈ξ棚轟l罠電風奮lrリ 2. Division 09 Section``Gypsunl BOard Assemblies''for site built gypsum bOard ceilings and clouds. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Ame五 can Society for Testing and Materials(AS■И)ASTM A641: Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.AsrM B22ltB22lM: standard specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. ASTM C423: Standard Test for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficient by the Reverberation Room Method. ASTM C635 : standard Specification for the Manufacture, performance, and resting of Metal Suspended Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay in panel Ceilings. ASTM C636: Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspinsion Systems for Acoustical Tile and L,ay in Panels. ASTM 81264: Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling products. ASTM El4l4:. Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required. B. Submit samples of available colors and finish for radial trim. Once trim color has been chosen, submit 12 inch sample with approved color and finish applied to actual trim profile. Submit shop drawings indicating layout arrangement, installation layout and details, and manufacturers data. I.O4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be pritected against damage from moisture. direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized 4. ARCON 15095。2095000‐1CEILINGS moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for project when occupied for its intended use. I.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acousfical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. I.O7 EXTRAMATERI.ALS A' Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. B . Acoustical Ceiling Units : Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2 .OVo of each type of amount installed. C. Color, textures, and patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated or,ifnot otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors, surface textures, and patterns available for acoustical ceiling units and exposed metal suspension system members of quality designated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.OI MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to those indicated for each designation in the acoustical panel ceiling schedule at the end ofpart 3. 2.02 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: provide metal suspension systems of type, structural classification and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 iequirements. B. Metal Suspension System Characteristics: Comply with requirements indicated int the Acoustical Panel Ceiling Schedule at the end of part 3. l. Baked enamel white finish for acoustical panel system. Heads of pop rivets to match color of grid. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table l, Direct Hung. D. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1 coating, sized so that stress at 3-times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table l, Direct Hung),will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gage. ARCON 15095。2095000…2CEILINCS PART 3 E. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Tlpe and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicted; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as . that used for exposed flanges of suspension systems runners. l. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetrations exactly. 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal ofsame depth and width as that formed between edge ofpanel and flange at exposed suspension member. F. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's product designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with the following requirements: 1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221t8 22Mfor alloy and temper 6063-T5. 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by other trades for support of acoustical ceilings. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width panel at borders. 3.02 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply with governing regulations, fue resistance rating requirements as indicate.d, and CISCA standards applicable to work. B. Install tile with pattern to align with light fixture layout. C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6 inches fromiach end oispaced 4'- 0" along each carrying channel or direct-hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12'-0". D. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye- screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. Do not attach to ductwork, conduit, piping, or any other mechanicaVelectrical item. E. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying or other equally effective means. F' Install edge moldings or type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations ARCON 15095。2095000‐3CEILINGS where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. G. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inch o.c. and not more than 3 inch from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in l2'-0',. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. H. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. I. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitled accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and peneftations to provide a near, precise fit. J. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities havingjurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommend by panel manufacture's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated or required. K. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension systern, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trir4 edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minoi finish. damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. ARCON 15095。2095000…4CEILINCS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SCHEDT]LE PANEL TYPE ATl A. Water-Felted, Mineral-Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling Type ATI: l. Where this designation is indicated, provide acoustical panels complying with the following: a. Fine Fissured; Armstrong Industries, Inc. b. Fine Fissured; Certainteed c. Radar Climaplus; USG Interiors, lnc. 2. Size:24 by 48 inches (610 by 610 mm).3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 4. Edge Detail: Square. 5. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. 6. Pattern: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 pattern designation (description) as specified by product designation. 7. Color: White. 8. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.80.9. Noise Reduction CoefEcienr NRC 0.55 in compliance with ASTM C423.10. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Not less than CAC 35 in compliance wirh ASTM El4l4.11. Dimensional Stability: Humidity resistant performance and intercept antimicrobial solution on front and back. 12. Warranty: Warranty period 10 years after date of substantial completion for acoustical panels and grid system. B. Suspension System for this ceiling type: 1 . Provide one of the following: a. Prelude XL; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.b. 15116" Classic Hoo( CertainTeed. c. 1200 Syster/2ll-219 Main Tee; Chicago Metallic Corporationd. DX/DXL;USG Interiors, Inc. 2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolystically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/4 653M, G01 (Zn0I) coating designation, with prefinished l5/16-inch-(24-mm) wide metal caps on flanges, other characteristics as follows: a. Structural Classification: Heavy duty system.b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.c. Face Design: Flush face. d. Cap Material: Steel sheet. e. Cap Finish: Painted white. END OF SECTION 09 50 OO ARCON 15095。2095000‐5CEILINGS SEC■ON 09 65 00 RES】LIENT FL00RING PART l GENERAL l.01 StIMMARY A. This Section includes the fonowing: 1. Rubber floor tile 2. VinyI Wall Base 3. Resilient molding accessoFieS. B. Related S∝tions include the fblloM7ing: ・ :需遺:漑 ∫蝋1脚 1露胤鷺露蹴:ど器卵鋼 1潔輩器町 2. E)ivision 02 Section``Seloctive l)emolition" 3. Division 09 Section``Carpet Tilげ'1.02 QUALITY ASSIIRANCE A Mmufact樹ぉI詰翼棚温富認寓盤Лsl富緊:鴻習出::t路淵『 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit manuFacturers technical data for each type ofresilient ao。五ng and accessory. B. Samples fbr lnitial Selection Purposesi Submit manufacturer's standard c010r charts in forln of actual sections ofresilient floo五 ng,including accessories,showlng full range of c01ors and pattems available,fbr each type ofresilient■oo五 ng requred. C. Manufacturer's cuFent installation instructions D. Moitture Suppression Me血 Ыmc Manufacter's waranty registratiOn with cOncrete sub■00r moisture test results and building ambient air temperature and relative hunidity test results. E. Maintenance Data:For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONSA鱗ビ躙 1淵ぽ試濾鼎器蠍 T掏羅%F l. 48 hours before installation. 2. DuHng installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Close spaces to trafrlc during floor covering installation. C. Close spaces to trafFlc for 48 hours after floor cove五 ng installation. ARCON 15095.2 096500‐1RESILIENT FL00RING 1.05 PART 2 2.01 2.02 D. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have b-een cured and are sufficienfly dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. F. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg c) or more than 95 deg F35 deg. MAINTENANCE A. Exfra Materials: Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner. B. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 25 boxes or fraction thereof, of each t5pe, color, color run, and pattem of floor tile installed. Fumish maintenance materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed and enclosed in protective packaging with identifying labels indicating building location of each color, texture and clor run.. C. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than l0 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 250 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, ofeach tlpe, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PRODUCTS RESILIENT COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Provide color and patterns as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. RUBBER FLOOR TrLE (RT-l) A. Resilient Rubber Tile Flooring with the following physical characteristics: 1 . Complies with requirements for ASTM F 1344 Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile,Class l‐A and l―B. Manufactured iЮ nl a homogeneous composition of 1009b synthetic rubber. Overall thickness: 1ノ 8'1. Tile Size:18"x18::or 24"x24:' 脇肝暉 As xLded by Archttt hm mmuね cturerヽ闘辟ご OptiO“br ms ASTM D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Properり _Durometer Hardness:65 Shore A. ASTM D 3389 Standard Test Method ibr Coated FabHcs AbrasiOn Resistance:<1.oo graln weight loss. ASTM D 2047,Standard Test Method for Static CoefFlcient OfF五 ction of P01ish_COated 賢ξ器語跳篭腑吼l翻 :識浮鑑棚蹴l瑞鰭″ぶ智t 撫ぶl翼 t鍔寵耳硼腱棚籠P瑞 ∬mS隠拇1祠鋼:ぶ wE 舎:肌 l繁露肥電趣;t:盤 :■織異螺1憮翻蹴霧ng Sが t磁 Phthalate,chloHne and halogen―free. 7. ARCON 15095.2 12. 09`500…2RESILIENT FL00RING B.Available Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: Flexco Johnsonite Nora Systems Roppe Mondo YINTLWALLBASE A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying wirh FS SS-w40, Type II, with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, and as follows: l. Height: 4 inch. 2. Irngth: 120 foot rolls. 3. Thickness: 1/8 inch gage. 4. Style: Standard top-set cove.5. Finish: Matte. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color palette. B' Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: l. Flexco 2. Johnsonite 3. Nora Systems, Inc. 4. Roppe 5. VPI RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORIES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with re4uirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: l. Flexco 2. Johnsonite 3. Nora Systems, Inc. 4. Roppe 5. YPI Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8 inch thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by Architect from standard colors available; not less than I inch wide. Install at all changes in floor material. ADA/IAC compliant Glue down vinyl moldings (as below or as indicated on drawings): 1. Transition/Adaptormoldings: a. For transition between resilient tile and carpetb. For transition between resilient tile and porcelain, ceramic or other tilec. For transition between ceramic tile and carpetd. For transition between carpet and exposed concrete 2. Reducer moldings/Edge guard moldings:a. For transition between resilient tile and exposed concrete.b. For transition between ceramic tile and exposed concretec. For transition between carpet and exposed concrete. 2.03 2.04 B. C. ARCON 15095。209`500‐3RESILIENT FLOORING 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives(Cements):waterpr001 stabilized type as recOmmended by aooring manufacturer to suit matenal and substrate conditions. B. Concrete Slab Primer:Non―staining type as recommended by flooFing manufacturer. PART 3 EXECU■ON 3.01 EXAMINA■ON A. Installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory. A satisfactory subfloor surface is defined as one that is smootl and free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or appearance. B. Inform rhe Architect if any of the following conditions are found: l. Cracks in the subfloor exceed l/4 inch in width.2. Differential settlement exceeding l/8 inch has occurred across a crack. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify intemal RH of the concrete according to ASTM F2l7O. 1. Record readings and submit to moisture suppression membrane manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's warranty registration.2. Do not install if relative humidity levels within the concrete exceel g57o. B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently. cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence of curing compounds. C. Do not proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory. D, Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows: 1. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and sealers. 2' The floor surface must be sound, solid, clean and free ofdebris, dust and any other particles. 3. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 4. For smoothing in ridges, filling cracks to a smooth finish, and leveling areas up to l/g inch thick, or as required to fill joints, etc., provide and install SD-F Feather finistr, as byARDEX, Inc., per manufacturer's instructions. This product is trowelable and does not require a primer, but the floor surface must be sound, solid, clean, and free of debris, dust and any other particles. This work is to be expected in all rooms and shall be part of the Base Bid. 5. For any existing flooring depressions over l/8 inch thick, provide and install ARDEX K- 15 self-leveling underlayment, or equivalent, as per manufacturer's instructions, after priming existing floor with ARDEX P-51 primer, diluted I : I with water. Again, the floor surface must be sound, solid, clean and free ofdebris, dust and any otherpanticles. Afterinstallation of the non-trowelable ARDEX K-15, use the SD-F Feather Finish to smooth any edges which may not feather down to the existing floor.6. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor.7. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to ARCON 15095。2096500‐4RESILMNT FLOORING application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufactureris directions. 3.03 RESILIEM FL00RING INSTALLATION A. GENERAL l. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. 2. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to permanent fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets and permanent columns, walls and partitions.3. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering atjoints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll resilient flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. 4. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust us ,ec"r.ury to avoid use of cut widths less than ll2 trle at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. 5. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around alffixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable.6. Match tiles for color and pattem by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deforrned tiles are not acceptable.7. I-ay tile in "checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in adjacenttiles.8. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. 9. Use only water based adhesives. Do not use solvent based adhesives.10. Protect moisture suppression membrane from damage during flooring installation. Do not tear, rip, puncture, or delaminate membrane when applying trowel on adhesive. Repair damaged areas according to membrane manufacturer's instructions before flooring installation. Provide continuous, intact moisture suppression membrane under entire designated floor area. I I ' Adhere resilient tile directly to moisture suppression membrane using tile manufacturer,s recommended water based adhesive. 3.U INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORTES A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with miiered or coiea insiae corners. rlgr,tifioro uur"to substrate throughout length ofeach piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. C. Fully adhere rubber stair tread units to stair tread substrate throughout length of tread. provide additional serurement at nosing of rubber stair tread unit as required. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION D. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient flooring: 1. Sweep and vacuum floor thoroughly. ARCON 15095。2096500‐5RESILIENT FL00RING 2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring to become well-sealed in adhesive.3. Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive soil.4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient flooring manufacturers. 5. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply with resilient flooring manufacturer's directions. END OF SECTION 09 65 OO ARCON 15095。2096500…6RESILIENT FLOORING SECTTON 09 6810 CARPET TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.OI SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Carpet Tile. 2. Accessories B. Related Sections include the following: I . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.2. Division 07, Section "surface Applied Vapor Reduction System" for moisture mitigation system. 3. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. C. ReEntry Specification Scope of Work (Owner required recycling of existing carpet) 1. Owner specifies that existing carpet and existing carpet waste be recycled in the best possible rumner. A reclamation plan will be submitted that will provide directions for the reclamation of recyclable carpet at the job site. "Environmentally friendly,' carpet recycling methods should be performed subsequent to job completior. In tt i, c*", "environmentally friendly'' methods consists of either: a. Recycling is turning waste materials into new materials of the same value, such as vinyl backing into vinyl backing.b. Upcycling involves turning waste materials into more valuable products. For example, using waste PET (plastic from soda bottles) to create Terratex fabric.c. Downcycling creates less valuable products from waste materials. Turning nylon face fiber into car parts or caq)et padding, including nylon face fiber in recyclea backings, or using carpet for waste-to-energy are good examples of downcycling.d. Repurposing allows a product to be reused by an organization or individual.e. Interface assist in facilitating the donation of used carpeting to charities and other non-profi t organizations. I.O2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on all physical characteristics specified in this section. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Preinstallation: Check list prior to installation of carpet. C. Shop Drawings: Show the following: l. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet.2. Existing flooring materials to be removed.3. Existing flooring materials to remain.4. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. ARCON 15095。2096810‐1CARPET TLE 5. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 6. Seamlayout: a. Seam location, types and methods. b. Seams run length the length of the area. c. Main trafEc runs long, rather than across, the seam. d. Incident light does not strike across the seam. e. Seams are away from areas subject to pivoting traffic.f. Seams are not perpendicular to doorway openings. 7. Pattern qpe, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 8. Pile direction. 9. Type, color, and location ofinsets and borders.10. Type, color, and location ofedge, transition, and other accessory strips.11. Transition details to other flooring materials. D' Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carper 12 inch (300 mm) square Sample.2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12 inch (300 mm) long Samples.3. Carpet Seam: 6 inch (150 mm) Sample. E. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. F. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.03 QUALTTYASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification progam requirements. B. Flooring contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation including floor preparation. The carpet installed in accordance with "Installation fo Commercial Carpet" CR1-104. C. Carpet manufacturer shall provide field service experts to assist in the project starrup. Manufacturer shall notify, in writing, Architect, General Contractor, and Owner if any installation instructions are not followed. l.M DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." B. All materials shall be delivered no earlier than 48 hours prior to start of installation. I.O5 PROJECTCONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity.', ' ARCON 15095.2 09 68 t0-2 CARpET TILE B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Relative humidiry 35-55 percent. 2. Ambient air temperature between 65 degrees F. and 75 degrees F. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recornmended by carpet manufacturer. D' Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.06 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Wriuen warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace. carpet, at no cost to Owner, that does not comply with requirements or that fails within spicified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual trafEc, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than I 0 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, mns, delamination, tuft bind, and moisture penetration. l. Warranty Period: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion. 1,07 EXTRAMATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. l. Carpel Tiles equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET TrLE (CPT-l) Carpet material shall be exactly what is shown and described on drawngs. A. Physical Characteristics: 1. Face Construction: Patterned Loop.2. Gauge: 5164 nch. 3. Stitches: I L3 per inch.4. Pile Height: 0.187 inches for hnished carpet perASTM D 4lg.5. Surface Pile Weight: 35.5 oz./sq. yd. 6. Density: Not less than 7,000 (as calculated by face weight x 36 divided by pile).7. Primary Backing: Fiberglass Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Vinyl Cusiion.8. Secondary Backing: LTP, UPS, or Unibond.9. Width: 24" x24" Modular Tile. ARCON 15095。2096810‐3CARPET TILE B, PerfOrmance Charactenstics:As follows: 1. Static Ceneration:Not more than 3.O Kv per AATCC-134 2. Dry Breaking Strength:Notless than 100 1bf(445→per ASlW D 2646. 3. Colorfasmess tO Crocking:Notless than 4,wet and dry,per AATCC-165. 4. Colorastness to Light:Notless than 4 alter 40 AFU(AATCC fading u面 ts)per AATCC‐16. 5. Antimicrobial Activity: Notless than 2-mm halo ofinhibition fOr grm_positive bacteria; notless han l―mln halo ofinhibition for grm―negative bacteria;nO rungal grO恥 th;perAATCC-174. 6. Πa―bility:Pass DOC― 「 F-1-70 Pilltest and meets NFPA Class l per ASW E‐648 glue down. 7. Smoke:Not morethan 450 flaming mode per NFPA 258 NBS smoke chamber. 8. Stain ResiStance:Mcets GSA requirements for AATCC 175. 9. Tutt Bind:20 1bs.average wet or dry per ASTM D-1335。 10.Moisture penetra●on:Lifetime per Dow Modined Spill Test McthOd E(Part 2)and moisture vapor Transmission Per ASTM E96. C. Adhesive System Characteristics: 1. Carpet:Securely attached to the floor in compliance with American With Disabilities Act ―Section 4.5.3 2. Product shall be installed in accordance wlth Standard For lnsレ』lation of Commercial Carpet CRl-104. 3. Floor Adhesive:Low VOC,wet set adhesive.Adhesive shan be appЮ ved and supplied by carpet manufacturer. 4. Adhesives shall have lifetime product perforlnance waranty. 2.02 1NSTALLA■ON ACCESSORIES A. TЮ welable Leveling and Patching Compounds:Latex―modined,hydraulic_cement―based fomulation provided by or reconllnended by the fonowing: 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives:Water―resistant,mildew―resistant,nonstai面 ng type tO suit pЮ ducts and subfloo■ condidons indicated,that complies with fla―ability requirements fOr installed carpet and that is proⅥded by the fol10wing: 1. Carpet manufacturer. C. Searnllng Cement: Hot―melt adhesive tape or simlar product reconlmended by carpet manufacturer fbr taping sealns and butting cut edges at backing tO fO.11l secure sealns and tO prevent pile loss at seams. D. Transition Strips:Provide and install“metal edge"transition stip as by Tandus Centiva.This strip will have to be modined to a11。w it to fonow tte curved transition between the carpet tile and the LVT in the library.Install per rnanufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMNAT10N A. Examine substrates,areas,and conditions for compliance wlth requirements for rnaximum moisture content,alkalinity range,installation tolerances,and other conditions afFecting carpet perforlnance.Ventt that Substrates and condidons are sadsfactory for carpet installa●on and ARCON 15095。2 o96810‐4 CARPET llLE comply with requirements specified. l. Usemanufacturer'spreinstallationchecklist. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Inform the Architect if any of the following conditions are found: l. Cracks in the subfloor exceed 114 inchin width.2. Differential settlement exceeding 1/8 inch has occurred across a crack. B. Veri$ intemal RH of the concrete according to ASTM F2l7O. l. Record readings and submit to moisture suppression membrane manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's warranty registration.2. Do not install if relative humidity levels within the concrete exceed 95Vo. C. Perforrn bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if surfaces are sufficiently cured and dry as well as to ascertain presence ofcuring compounds. D. Do not proceed until subfloor surfaces are satisfactory. E. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation,,, and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. F' Subfloor preparation shall meet all conditions as specified in the manufacturer's installation handbook instructions. G. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Skim coat the entire existing floor slab to meet carpet manufacturers requirements. H. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in uriting by the following: 1. Carpetmanufacturer. I' Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. procied with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 MOISTURE STIPPRESSION MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Install moisture suppression membrane with smooth film side facing concrete slab. B. Install in accordance with membrane manufacturer's current written installation instructions. C. If any job site condition interferes with compliance with manufacturer's instructions, contact manufacturer and obtain written job specific procedures. Notify Architect describing the job site condition and manufacturer's job specific instructions. ARCON 15095。209`810‐5CARPET■lLE 3.U INSTALI-ATION A. Use only water based adhesives. Do not use solvent based adhesives. B. Protect moisture suppression membrane from damage during flooring installation. Do not tear, rip, puncture, or delaminate membrane when applying trowel on adhesive. Repair damaged areas according to membrane manufacturer's instructions before flooring installation. provide continuous, intact moisture suppression membrane under entire designated floor area. C. Adhere carpet directly to moisture suppression membrane using carpet manufacturer,s recommended adhesive. D. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI lM, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." 1. Use trowel 1/8" x l/8" x 1116" for adhesive application. E. Stair Installation: comply with cRI 104, Section 12, "carpet on Stairs." F' Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. H. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. I. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marhng device. K. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement ofequipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 68 10 ARCON 15095。2096810‐`CARPET TLE SECI■ON 09 90 00 PAINTING PART l l.01 GENERAL SIIMMARY B. C. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting ofthe following: 1. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 2. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. Related Sections include the following: l. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0l Specification sections, apply to work of this section. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. l. Painting includes field painting ofexposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Work under this contract includes but is not necessarily limikd to the following: l. High pressure washing and abrasive blasting in accordance with the requirements of .2. Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance ofpainting including cleaning, small crack repair, patching and making good surfaces and areas to the limits defined under MPI preparation requirements 3. Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation in accordance with MPI and wall covering manufacturer's requirements 4. Specific pre-trcatrnents noted in this section or specified in the MPI Architectural Painting Specifi cation Manual. 5. Priming (except where pre-primed with an approved primer under other sections of work) and painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, ornamental metal and primed steel equipment. 6. Priming and back-priming of wood materials as noted in this section or specified in the MPI architectural Painting Specifi cation Manual. 7 . Painting of all semi-concealed areas (e.g. inside of light roughs and valances, behind grilles, and projecting edges above and below sight lines).8. Painting and finishing of all exposed to view elevator equipment and components (i.e. doors and door frames) unless pre-finished. 9. Painting of exposed to view mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing) services and equipment, (e.g. ducts, sprinkler piping, etc.) and electrical work io extent noted on Finish Schedule unless pre-finished. 10. Re-painting ofexisting surfaces and finishes when adjacent to new painting work where applicable including surface preparation, prime and finish coats in accordance with MpI Repainting requirements. 1 1. Provision of safe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary ventilation supplied by others, where toxic and/or volatile / flammable materials are being D. ARCON 15095。2099000‐1PAINTING used. E. Do not paint prefinished iGms, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Metal toilet enclosures. d. Metal lockers. e. Elevator entrance doon and frames. f. Elevator equipment. E. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. h. Light fixtures. i. Distribution cabinets. 2- Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts^ g. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. F. Related Sections include the following: l. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 0l Specification Sections, apply to rhis Section.2. Division 02 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" 3. Division 02 Section "Portland Cement Concrete paving,' 4. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel" 5. Division 05 Section "Steel Joists" 6. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" ARCON 1509s.2 09 90 00-2 pAINTING 'l . Division 08 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" 8. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" 9. Division 09 Section "Wood Gymnasium Flooring" 10. Divisions 23 and 26: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 23 and 26, respectively. I.O2 REFERENCES The latest edition of the following reference standards shall govern all painting work: Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MpI) including identifiers, evaluation, systems, preparation and approved product list. (Hereafter referred to as MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the local MpI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdicition. Test Method for Measuring Total volatile organic Compound of consumer products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings) of the Environmental Protection Agency. 1.03 StJBヽ〔ErrALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. l. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. Finish schedule of indicating room name, room number, product, manufacturer, sheen, and associated MPI System Manufacturer's Information: a. Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions forhandling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. Certification by the manufacturer that products fumished are in accordance with voC content limits and other requirements of State of Illinois Title 35 (Section 223). Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Architect will fumish color chips for surfaces to be coated. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples ofthe actual substrate. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: 2. B. C. ARCON 15095。2099000‐3PAINШG a. Painted Wood: Provide lwo 12 inch (300 mm) square samples of each color and material on hardboard. b. Stained or Natural wood: provide two 4 by 8 inch (loo by 200 mm) samples of natural- or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonsEate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses ofarchitects and owners, and other information specified. Submit a finish schedule of all painting materials indicating room name, room number, product At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance. At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials. r.04 QUALTTYASSURANCE Contractor shall have a minimum offive years proven satisfactory expserience and shall show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters throughout the duration of the work. Qualified journeypersons, as defined by local jurisdiction shall be engaged in painting and decorating work. Apprentices may be eomployed provided they work under the direcl supervision ofa qualifiedjourneyperson in accordance with fiade regulations. AII materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirements of the latest edition of the MPI Painting Manual All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the Approved Product List section of the MPI Painting Manual. The painting contractor shall receive written confirmation ofthe specific surface preparation procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator/supplier to ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat materials to be used before painting any such work. Regulatory Requirements : 1. Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by applicable authorities havingjurisdiction in regard to site safety (ladders, scaffolding, ventilation, etc.) 2. Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction in regard to the storage, mixing, application and disposal of all paint and related waste materials. 3. Notify the Paint Inspection Agency on award of contract and make application for assignment of an Inspector using appropriate forms supplied by the Agency as well as provide a copy ofthe project painting specification, drawings, color schedule and list of proposed materials for review purposes prior to commencement of work.4. Fully cooperate at all times with the requirements of the Paint Inspection Agency in the performance oftheir duties, including providing access and assistance as required to complete inspection work. Mock-Ups: When requested by the Architect, provide duplicate 12" square samples of surfaces or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified paint or coating in colors, gloss / sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval. When D. E. F. G. A. B. C. D. F. G. ARCON 15095。2099000‐4PAINTING approved, samples shall become acceptable standard ofquality for appropriate on site surface with one of each sample retained on site. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successfu I in-service performance. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat maGrials for each coating systom from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDIING Deliver materials to the Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: l. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. ffinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free offoreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. C. Where toxic and/or volatile / explosive / flammable materials are being used, provide adequate fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no smoking) as required. D. Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated containers and removed from the site on a daily basis. E. Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information on these conEols from applicable State and Local government departments having jurisdiction. 2. All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. Materials that cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner. 3. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive fubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.4. To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems A. B. ARCON 15095。2099000‐5PAINTING or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to: a. Retain cleaning water for water based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water.b. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal. c. Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.d. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations. e. Empty painl cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).f. Close and seal tighflypartly used cans ofmaterials including sealant and adhesive containers and store proteated in well ventilated fue safe area at moderate temperature. C. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by the Owner and deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re- manufacturing. 1.07 PROJECTCONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.08 EXTRAMATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver exfia materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities indicated below: a. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.785 L) or I case, as appropriate, ofeach material and color applied. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.OI MANTIFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 2. PPG Architectural Coatings (PPG). 3. Pratt & Lambert (PNL) 4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (SW). ARCON 15095。2099000‐6PAINTING 2.02 MATERTALS A. OnIy materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, etc.) listed in the latest edition of the MPI Approved Product List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project. All such material shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used. B. Other materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, solvents, etc. shall be the highest quality product of an MPI listed manufacturer and shall be compatible with paint materials being used as required. C. All materials used shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC content where possible. D. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of blemishes, sags, air entrapment, etc. E. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings desiglated by local Code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 MDilNGAND TINTING A. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved, all paint shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted. Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity. 1. Tinted primers are not acceptable. B. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints. D. If required, thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. Ifdirections are not on container, obtain instructions in writing frommanufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Architect. 2.04 FIMSH AND COLORS A. Unless otherwise specified herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI Custom Grade finish requirements. B. Colors shall be as selected by the Consultant from a manufacturer's full range of colors. Refer to Finish Schedule and drawings for identification and location ofcolors. C. Interior colors and./or pattems shall be consistent throughout with two (2) separate schemes prepared. D. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled, walls shall be painted the same color within a given area. E. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating) shall be painted white. F. Corridors shall be painted the same color on all floors with two (2) separate color schemes prepared for doors and trim. G. Designated rooms / spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color than ARCON 15095.2 09 90 00-7 pAINTING typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of two (2) colors required. H. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, interior walls and ceiling surfaces shall be painted in accordance with the following criteria over appropriate prime / sialer coat: 1. All areas (except as noted): washable latex with G3 (eggshell) finish.2. Laundry facilities / rooms, public wash / shower / bathrooms, residential kitchens and bathrooms: washable latex with G5 (semi-gloss) finish.3. Public change / wash / shower rooms and institutional facility bathing and shower rooms: epoxy (tile-like) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for wet surfaces. 4. Public and institutional facility "clean" or "sanitary" areas such as food preparation and laboratory areas: epoxy (tileJike) G5 (semi-gloss) finish for dry surfaces. I. Doors shall be painted a different color than door frames and trim with walls a different color than either. Unless otherwise noted or scheduled all doors, frames and trim shall be painted using a G5 (semi-gloss) finish. J. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, exit and vestibule doors shall be painted a contrasting color to walls and a different color than any other door in the same area. K. Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware (e.g. door closers), registers, radiators and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to match adjacint surfaces (i.e. same color, texture and sheen), unless otherwise noted or where pre-finisired. L. Plywood service panels (e.g. electrical, telephone and cable vision panels) including edges shall be back-primed and painted to match painted wall mounted on. M. The inside of light valances shall be painted gloss white. N. The inside of all duct work behind louvers, grills and diffusers for a minimum of 460 mm (1g") or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, shall be painted using flat black (non-reflecting) paint. 2.05 GLOSS AND SHEEN RATINGS A. Gloss / Sheen Ratings: l. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating ofapplied paint, in accordance with the following MPI values:2Gloss level ratings ofall painted surfaces shall be as specified and as noted on Finish Gloss Level Description Units at 60 degrees Units at 85 degrees Gl Matte or Flat inish Oto 5 10 max. G2 Velvet inish O to 10 10 to 35 G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 35 njn. G4 Satin fl面 sh 20 to 35 G5 Semi―Gloss flnish 351o70 G6 Gloss fl面 sh 70 to 85 G7 High-Gloss finish >85 ARCON 15095。2099000‐8PAINTING Schedule. PART 3 EXECU■ON 3.01 Condition of Surfaces: A. Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine (and test as required) all conditions and surfaces scheduled to be painted and report in writing to the Contractor and Architect any conditions or surfaces that will adversely affect work ofthis section. B. No painting work shall corunence until all such adverse conditions and defects have been corected and surfaces and conditions are acceptable to the Painting contractor. C. Commencement of work shall not be held to imply acceptance of surfaces except as qualifred herein. Such surfaces as concrete, masonry, stnrctural steel and miscellaneous metal, wood, gypsum board and plaster, shall not be the responsibility ofthe Painting contactor. D. The Painting contractor shall not be responsible for the condition of the substrate or for correcting defects and deficiencies in the substrate which may adversely affect the painting work except for minimal work normally performed by the Painting contractor and as indiiated. Painting Subcontactor shall assure that surfaces are properly prepared before any paint or coating is applied. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Preparation of Surfaces: l. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements. Refer to the MpI painting Manual in regard to specific requirements for the following: environmental conditions. pH testing. rust stain removal. vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces. clay and concrete masonry units. strucfural steel and miscellaneous metals. E. steel exposed to high heat. h. galvanized and zinc coated metal. i. dimension and dressed lumber.j. wood decks, floors, stairs and steps.k. stucco, plaster and gypsumboard. l. canvas and cotton coverings. 2. Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and./or test all surfaces under adequate illumination, ventilation and temperature requirements.3. Remove and securely store all miscellaneous hardware and surface fittings / fastenings (e.g. electrical plates, mechanical louvers, door and window hardware (e.g. hinges, kirobs, locks, trim, frame stops), removable rating / hazard / instruction labels, washroom accessories, light fixture trim, etc. from wall and ceiling surfaces, doors and frames, prior to painting. Carefully clean and replace all such items upon completion of painting work in each area. Do not use solvent or reactive cleaning agents on items that will mar or remove finishes (e.g. lacquer finishes). Doors shall be removed before painting to paint bottom and top edges and then re-hung.4. Protect all adjacent interior surfaces and areas, including rating and instruction labels on doors, frames, equipment, piping, etc., from painting operations and damage with drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make gooA -y ARCON 15095。2099000‐9PAINTING damage caused by failure to provide such protection. 5. Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly after the fust coat of paint. Start of finish painting of defective surfaces (e.g. gypsum board) shall indicate acceptance of substrate and any costs of making good defects shall be bome by the painter including re-painting of entire defective surface (no touch-up painting). 6. Confirm preparation and primer used with fabricator of steel items. Refer to euality Assurance. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until all environmental conditions (heating, ventilation, lighting and completion ofother subtrade work) are acceptable for applications of products. B. Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade finish requirements. C. Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified applicators as noted under Quality Assurance. D. Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer's paint specifi cations require earlier applications. E. Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper consistency and in accordance with manufacturcr's recommendations. F. Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confi.rmation of number of coats. 1. Tinted primers are not acceptable. G. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, apply a minimum of four coats of paint where deep or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results. H. Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39"). I. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufEciently dry. Unless manufacturer,s directions state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied. J. Prime coat of stain or vamish finishes may be reduced in accordance with manufacturer,s directions. 3.04 INTERIOR PAINT AND COATING SYSTEMS A. Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual requirements: 1. Concrete Vertical Surfaces (including horizontal soffits): a. INT 3.lA (MPI52): Larex G3 finish (overprimer). b. Basis-of-Design Product: ProMar 200 Trro VOC Interior L,atex 2. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces (floors and stairs): a. INT 3.2G (MPI 127): Concrete floor sealer, water based finish. ARCON 15095。2099000‐10 PAINTING b. Basis-of-Design Product SW ArmorSeal Tread-Plex 3. Clay Masonry Units (pressed and extruded brick and only where indicated on room finish schedule): a. INT 4.1A (MPI lzt4): l,atex G3 finish. b. Basis-of-Design Product ProMar 200 Znro VOC Inrcrior Latex 4. Concrete Masonry Units (does not include ground and split face block and brick): a. INT 4.2A (MPI 52): Iatex finish over block filler - G3 finish.b. The application of water repellent or clear finishes shall be done by others per Division 04 Section'Masonry Assemblies" c. Basis-of-Design Producfi ProMar 2OO 7*ro VOC Interior L,atex 5. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications (beams, joists, and deck): a. INT 5.1C (lvIFI226): Water based dry fall finish - G5 finish.b. Basis-of-Design Product SW Pro Industrial waterborne Acrylic Dryfall 6. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications (columns, beams, joists, etc.): a. INT 5.lQ (MPI 141): Pre catalyzed acrylic epoxy - G5 finishb. Basis-of-Design Product Pro Industrial pre-catalyzed waterbased Expoxy 7. Galvanized Metal (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, etc.): a. INT 5.3A (MPI 141): Pre-catalyzrA acrylic epoxy - G5 finish.b. Basis-of-Design Product Pro Industrial pre-catalyzed waterbased Expoxy 8. Stained Dimension Lumber (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.): a. INT 6.2J (MPI 57): Varnish Interior, Polyurethane, Oil Modified over stain - G4 finish. b. Basis-of-Design Product SW-Minwax Wood Classics Polyurethane Varnish 9. Stained Dressed Lumber (window frames, casings, moldings, and running trim): a. INT 6'3E (MPI 129): Water based clear polyurethane varnish over stain - G5 finish. b. Basis-of-Design Producr SW-Minwax water Based polyurethane varnish 10. Painted Dimension Lumber (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, etc.): a. INT 6.2D: Latex G3 finish (over latex primer).b. Basis-of-Design Product: SW pro industrial Acrylic 866_660 series 1 1. Painted Dressed Lumber (window frames, casings, moldings and running trim): a. INT 6.34: High performance architectural latex - G5 finishb. Basis-of-Design Product SW Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss 866 series 12. Plaster and Gypsum Board (gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock gpe material", etc., and textured finishes): ARCON 15095。2099000‐11 PAINTING a. INT 9.2A (MPI 144): latex G3 finish. b. Basis-of-Design Product SW Pro Mar 200 7arcYOC Interior Latex 13. Painting of interior game line layouts with colors as noted on approved game line layout drawing on gymnasium flooring to be by others. 3.05 MECHAMCAL, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND RELATED SURFACES A. Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all 'tnfinished" conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces, in the following areas: 1. Where exposed-to-view in all exterior and interior areas.2. In all interior high humidity interior areas. 3. In all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms. B. In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks. C. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment. D. Do not paint over nameplates. E' Paint the inside of alt ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffrrsers for a minimum of 460 mm (18") or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat of matt black (non-reflecting) painr F. Paint the inside of Iight valances gloss white. G. Paint disconnect switches for fue alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel. H. Paint red or band all fire protection piping and sprinkler lines in accordance with mechanical specification requirements. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint. I. Paint yellow or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification requirements. J. Backprime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical equipment before installation to match adjacent wall surface. Irave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessorieJand other unRrish"d items. K. Paint exterior steel electrical light standards. Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation equipment. 3.06 FIELD QUALTTY CONTROL AND CONDTTIONS OF ACCEPTANCE A. Al surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected. B. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness ifany of the following defects are apparent to the Owner or Architect: 1. Brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in paiit coatings. ARCON 1509s.2 09 90 00-12 *AINTIN. 3.07 2. Evidence ofpoor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lapjoints, crevices, pockets, corners and re-entrant angles. 3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory caus€.4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the weather. 5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint, etc.). C. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable ifany ofthe following are evident under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces: l. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at nornal viewing angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39"). 2' Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39"). 3. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles. 4. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformit5r of color, sheen, texture, and hiding across full surface area. D. Painted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor. Small affected areas rnay be touched up; large affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film thickness ofpaint shall berepainted. Runs, sags ofdamaged paint shall be removed by sciaper or by sanding prior to application ofpaint. PROTECTION A. Protect all exterior surfaces and areas, including landscaping, walks, drives, all adjacent building surfaces (including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc.) and equipment and any labels and signage from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shields, masking, templates, or oti'". - suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide such protection. B. Protect all interior surfaces and areas, including glass, aluminum surfaces, etc. and equipment and any labels and signage from painting operations and damage by drop cloths, shieids, masking, templates, or other suitable protective means and make good any damage caused by failure to provide such protection. C. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to wam of or limit or direct traffic away or around work area as required. CLEAN UP Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris. Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water / solvents as well as all other cleaning and protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint removers / strippers in accordance with the safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.08 A. C. D. ARCON 15095。2099000‐13 PAINTING 3.09 TOUCH UP PAn劇肛NG OF EXISTING FINISHES A・ Refer to MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual for repaindng of e対 sting inishes. B. Use Flnish coat ofrespective new su」ace paint system for minor repnlr Of existing FInishes. Use system p五 mer where c対 sting inishes are damaged down to bare surface. END OFSEC■ON 09 90 CICl ARCON 15095。2099000‐14 PAINTING sEcTroN 260010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL I.O1 GENERALCONDITIONS A. The General Conditions of the Contract for the Construction of Buildings, Standard Form of the American Insfitute of Architects current edition, The Supplementary General Conditions and the Mechanical and Electrical Special Conditions are a part of these specifications. I.O2 WORKINCLUDED A. Basic Electrical Requirements are specifically applicable to Divisions 26,27 & 28. B. This specification and accompanlng plans cover and shall govern the installation of a complete electrical system, all as specifically set forth herein, and as indicated in the plans. C. The drawings and these specifications are complementary each to the other, and what is called for by one shall be as binding as ifcalled for by both. They are intended to include everything requisite and necessary to the entire finishing ofthe work notwithstanding that every item necesiarily required by such work is not especially mentioned or shown. D. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and material necessary for the complete system and items ofwork including (but not limited to): t. All work complaint with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 2. All work complaint with Illinois Administrative Code (IAC) 180 and all building codes as listed inIAC Section 180.60 All electrical service equipment for the building as indicated on the plans and as herein specified and/or as required by the Service Companies for general and emergency lighting, and power. Equipment wiring Wiring Devices Stnrctured Telecommunications Cabling and Enclosures All branch circuit wiring Fumish, install and connect all conduit, fittings, outlet boxes and junction boxes, complete with wiring as required for complete systems. Furnish, install and connect all switches, receptacles and miscellaneous electrical equipment as required and as shown on the plans and as hereinafter specified. E. Contractor will distinct$ understand that the work described herein is to be a finished job, and the whole completed in a workmanlike manner. The omission from either the drawings or specifrcations of minor details which ordinarily form a part offirst class work ofthis character and are necessary to the completion of this project as contemplated and described, shall not be a cause for *y "xru cost, but shall be included by this Contractor as if specifically mentioned or shown. I.O3 REFERENCES A. Materials, equipment and installation thereof shall conform to the latest editions of the following:1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 2. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials3. CBM - Certified Ballast Manufactueres4. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories 5. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers6. NBS - National Bureau of Standards 7. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association8. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association 9. OSHA - Occupation Safety and Health Act. 10. UL - Underwriters Laboratores 11. BOCA - Building OfFrcials & Code Administrators International, Inc.12. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society ofNorth America 4. { 6. 7. 8. 9. ARCON 15095 260010‐1BASIC ELECTR!CAL REQUIREMENTS 13. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180 14. All materials, equipment, and installation thereof shall conform to the standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and of the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) B. Notify the Architect/Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed to be inadequate, unsuitable, in violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. In every installation where regulations of electric utility and telephone companies apply, conformance with their regulations is mandatory and any costs involved shall be included in the Contract, with the exception of exfra facility and other charges which are directly paid by the Owner. or as otherwise instructed herein. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section. B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in each Division 26,27 & 28 Section: C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products and accessories in a single submittal. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. E. Contractor shall review all shop drawings prior to submitting them for ArchitectlEngineer,s review. Contractor shall stamp each shop drawing to certifu that he has reviewed it. Engine-r will not check any drawings that Contractor has not stamped with his review certification. F. Owner's representative shall review all materials, equipment, fixtures, motor control centers, panelboards, control panels, etc., and other appurtenances provided for this work before proceeding with the purchase and installation. G. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other data necessary for the Owner's Representative to ascertain that the proposed equipmenUfixtures and materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be legible and clearly identify equipment/fixtures being submitted. H. Submittals for individual system and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item or componont shall be made for the system as a whole. Where necessary, submit plans of the system drawing on sheel sizes same as the contract drawings. Partial submittals will noi be considered for approval. I- Owner's Representative review of shop drawings will be rendered as a service only and shall not be considered as a guarantee ofmeasurements or ofbuilding conditions, nor shall it be construed as relieving the Contractor ofbasic responsibilities under his contract. J. Ifthe shop drawings show variations fiom contract requirements because ofshop practice or other reasons' Contractor shall make specific reference to such variation in his letter oliransmittal in order that,of acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment; otherwise Conhactor will not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with contract documents even though such shop drawings have been reviewed. K. All shop drawings shall be submitted to permit owner's Representative ample time to review before material is released for delivery to job. L. Contractor shall maintain a permanent file of shop drawings to turn over to Owner's Representative atcompletion of project. M. Submitals shall include l/4" = l'-0" dimensioned drawings of all electrical equipment rooms for review before installation continues. N. Coordination and Record Drawings: I . In addition to the preparation and submittal of shop drawings and product data for manufactured electrical equipment and materials, prepare and maintain in current stafus, a complete set of detailed, completely circuited, and dimensioned electrical record drawings for electrical work included under the Contract. ARCON 15095 260010‐2BASIC ELECTR!CAL REQUIREMENTS 0. P. 2. In addition to the floor and ceiling plans, layouts of all functionally critical areas and congested areas, such as mechanical and electrical equipment rooms. shall be drawn at a minimum scale of 1/4" equals l'-0'luith all details of construction shown.3. Record drawings shall be made under the direction and supervision of the Contractor and shall show all electrical work inclusive of conduit, wiring, electrical equipment and devices, lighting fixture locations and elevations, points where conduit enters or leaves structural slabs anJ walis,junction boxes, conduit supports and inserts. The complete electrical distribution system fiom source or sources up to and including each branch circuit panelboard shall be shown and dimensioned exactly as installed, with all feeders located on plan. Major equipment and apparatus shall be shown to scale and properly located. Drawings shali also show locations and dep'li of underground conduits and ducts and their terminations, as installed.4- Coordination drawings shall be made on 3 mil mylar sheets or CAD drawing compatible with AutoCAD Version 14.0 of the same size and with the same border lines and title blocks as the Architect/Engineer's Drawings, with the Contractor's name added.5. Coordinate electrical work with the work of other trades and in preparing the record drawings, check the work of other trades in order to avoid possible installation conhicts arising therefrlm. In the event ofconflicts ofinterferences that cannot be resolved in the field, request u initt"n clarification from the Architect/Engineer. 6. Record drawings shall indicate the elechical installation exactly as constructed and shall be periodically revised to reflect all changes, including those required by the Architect/Eigineer, ttrose which are or have been found necessary in the field and those which may be suggested f,y the' Contractor and accepted by the Architect/Engineer. Drawings shall be revised when considered necessary the the Architect/Engineer or the Contractor in order to facilitate proper coordination.7. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, the drawings are in acceptable condition after each has been finally revised, they may be submitted as the field record drawings. Equipment Drawings: 1. Provide complete set of shop drawings bound in permanent binder.2. Provide typewritten list of each type, quantity and manufacturer of lamp installed.3. Provide typewritten list of each type, quantity, size and manufacturer of fuse, motor overload heater, etc., installed. 4. Provide a complete list of all replaceable components for maintenance purposes. Maintenance and Operating Manuals 1. Maintenance and Operation Manual, submit as required for systems and equipment specified in thetechnical sections. Furnish five (5) copies, bound in hardback binders, manufacturert standard binders or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the technical section, but in no case later than prior to performance of systems or equipment test, and n 1,,irf, tfr"remaining manuals prior to contract completion.2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the works "MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUAL", the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name ofContractor and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses and trf-.pfro* - numbers ofeach subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local representatives forthe system or equipment. 3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents, with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be legible anj easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.4. The manual shall include: a. Intemal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of the equipment. b. A conhol sequence describing start-up, operation and shutdown.c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.d. Installation and maintenance instructions. e. Safety precautions. f. Diagrams and illustrations. ARCON 15095 260010‐3BAS:C ELECTR!CAL REQU:REMENTS g. Testing methods. h. Performance data. i. Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range and frequency. i. Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended spare parts and name of servicing organization. k. Appendi{ list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support ofthe equipment, including addresses and certified qualifications. A. POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS l. Fumish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams, control diagrams and controls sequence for each principal system and equipment. prini or *grur. operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions were directed. Attach orpost operating instructions adjacent to each principal system and equipment including start-up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and procedure in the event of equipment failwe. Provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures for operating instructions exposed to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposedto sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal. 1.0s REGULATORY REQITTREMENTS A. The work shall be performed in accordance with codes, laws, and ordinances of Federal, State and local governing bodies having jurisdiction. B. In case of differences between building codes, Federal and State laws, local ordinaces and utility compiuly regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. C. Fire Alarm: Conform to the latest edition ofNFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code) D. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 1 80 and all building codes as listed in IAC se6ion 1g0.60 E. Obtain permits and request inspections fiom authority having jurisdiction. F. Obtain approvals, where required, from inspection authorities for exit, emergency lighting, fire alarm device locations, and other electrical installations requiring specific approval. Prints ofthe Electrical Drawings, for this purpose, will be furnished by the Architect on request. Required wiring diagrams shall be provided and submitted for approval by the Contractor. Copies of the final approved diawings shall be delivered to the Architect. Approvals shall be obtained before commencement of related work. G. Pay all fees, and other charges incident to electrical work and obtain and pay for required insurance, permits, licenses, and inspections. Arrange for all required inspections and deliver certificates and approval for same to the Architect, as a requirement for final payment. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. The drawings furnished in the bid set are to give the general intent of the mechanical and electrical requirements. All information for installation is not shown and is not fully coordinated with Architectural and Mechanical drawing and specifications. They are not intended as final installation drawings, although they may be used as a guide if the Confractor feels that sufficient information for installation is shown. Installation must be fully coordinated with all trades. If it is necessary to clarifu or provide more detail than is shown, this Contractor shall prepare drawings and submit the same for review and comment. B. Carefully examine the contract documents, visit the site, and thoroughly become familiar with the local conditions relating to the work. Failure to do so will not relieve the contractor of the Contract. C. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. D. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project Conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before pro-ceeding. I.O7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIF"T EQUIPMENT DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any materials or proceeding with the work, this Contractor shall veri! all measurements at the site and be responsible for correctness of same. No exfa compensation will be allowed because of ARCON 15095 260010‐4BASiC ELECTRICAL REQU:REMENTS difference between the actual measurements and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect's Superintendent on the job for rectification before proceeding with the work. B. Contractor and/or manufacturer shall veri$ that the capacity and duty specified meets the characteristics of the equipment he submits for review. C. If equipment is submitted for review and does not meet the physical size or arrangement of what was scheduled and specified, Contractor shall pay for all altemations required to accommodate such equipment at no additional cost to the Ovmer. Contractor shall also pay all costs for additional work required by other Contractors, Owner, Architect or Engineer to make changes which would allow the equipment to fit the space. 1.08 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND OPENINGS A. Conhactor shall field verify the size of existing openings, windows, doors, corridors, rooms, etc. for access of the new equipment into the existing building. If openings are too small for access, then Contractor shall provide new or enlarged openings, at his own expense, to facilitate entrance into existing space or building. Contractor may elect to order the equipment disassembled and/or with split housing for entrance into the existing space or building. Contractor shall reassemble equipment aftir it is in the space at his own expense. 1.09 OCCUPANCY ADJUSTMENTS A. Provide on-site assistance in testing and verification of systems for this project to meet occupancy conditions. B. Provide up to three on-site assistance visits within one year of Substantial Completion. PART2 PRODUC]TS 2.OI MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Proposal shall be based upon the furnishing of all materials and equipment as specified, which in every case shall be new and, where not specifically referred to by manufacfurer's name, of the best grade ani quality available. B. Materials used through this installation shall be new (without blemish or defect) and the best of their respective kind and the same shall be installed in a neat, accurate, and workrnanlike manndr, and in a manner to permit the work of other trades to also be installed wherever the work covered by this specification meets with, or must be considered, in connection with the work of other trades working on this installation. Equipment shall not be used for temporary light and power purposes, including larips. This workmanship and these materials must be executed and furnished in a manner entirely satiifactory to the Owner's Representative. C. Items of equipment of within a specificy category type (such as fuses, conduit, electrical distribution equipment [distribufion switchboards, panelboards, motor starters, enclosed switches] wiring systems), shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout, unless otherwise indicated or acceptedly the Architect/Engineer. D. Where two types of similar equipment are specified or shown on the drawings, the Base Bid will be based on the higher quality or greater number. All work shown on the drawings & specifications will be adjusted to comply with all sections of the Local Codes. E. Wherever in the specifications, a particular article or material is definitely mentioned, it shall be provided and no substitutions shall be allowed, especially insofar as the submittal of the base bid is concemed. Should this Contractor desire to substitute other materials for those specified, he may submit these substitutions in the form ofvoluntary alternates to the base bid, designating appropriate additions or deductions for each alternate. Should no alternates be submitted, the contract shait be entered into on the basis of the specified base bid equipment. Final review of equipment shall be by the Owner's Representative. Voluntary alternates will only be recognized at the time of bid. F. A specification item followed by one (1) or more manufacturers; names of other manufacfurers may be submitted for review to the Owner's Representative a minimum of seven (7) days prior to receiving bids. Acceptance will be granted only ifissued by addendum (no exceptions). ARCON 15095 260010-5 BAS:C ELECTRICAL REQU:REMENTS G. A specification item followed by one (l) or more manufacturers and "or equal" is open to all equal products or materials. However, Contractor shall supply one (l) of the listed manufacturers at no additional cost if Owner's Representative determines substituted product unsatisfactory. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Receive, handle, and store electrical items and materials at the project site. Materials and electrical items shall be so placed that they are protected fiom damage and deterioration. Damaged or othjerwise unsuitable materials and electrical items shall be immediately removed from theiite. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The Drawings for work under Divisions 26,27 &.28 are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope ofwork and indicate the general arrangement ofconduit, boxes, equipment, devices, fixturis and other work included in the Conhact. B. Location of items required by the Drawings or specifications not fixed by dimensions are approximate only and exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results shall be determined at the site and shall be subjectto the approval ofthe Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for exacVfinal location and coordination ofall devices and in case any devices are not installed in correct location, Contractor shall move same including all necessary cutting and patching at Contractor's expense. C. Owner reserves right to change position of any/all devices or fixtures within 10'-0" radius before work is installed without exha charge. D. Check with Heating Contractor as to location of radiation, Ventilation Contractor as to location of ducts and grilles, and Plumbing Contractor as to location of piping before installing the work. E. Contractor shall consult with the Architect and review the plans to verift the exact locations of all outlets and mounting heights to insure that all outlets are above counters where cabinet work and,/or fumiture occurs and switches are at the correct side of door swings. F. This Contractor shall consult with the Equipment Suppliers for the correct sizes of all outlets in sufficient time before wall construction. G. Follow drawings in layout out work, check drawings of other ffades to veri$ spaces in which work will be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points. H. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Architect/Engineer shall be notified beforeproceeding with installation. I. Minor conduit rerouting and changes shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. J. Whenever it becomes necessary for the complete fulfillment of this specification to fumish labor or materials, other than that which is generally accepted by trade agreement or general practice to belong to his particular trade or branch of work, he shall sublet such work or shall employ *ork nrn regularly employed, to the end that there will be no delay or stoppage of work due to infringement or "it"g"iinfringement of trade agreements as to jurisdiction. K. Perform all work with skilled mechanics of the particular trade involved in a neat and workmanlike manner. L. Furnish other trades advance information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves and openings needed for the work, and also furnish information and shop drawings necessary to permit trades affected to install their work properly and without delay. M. Where there is evidence that work of one trade will interfere with the work of other trades, all trades shall assist in working out space allocations to make satisfactory adjustments and shall be prepared to submit and revise coordinate shop drawings. N. With the approval ofthe Architect/Engineer and without additional cost to the Owner, make minor modifications in the work as required by structural interferences, by interferences with work of other trades or for proper execution ofthe work. ARCON 15095 260010‐6BASIC ELECTR!CAL REQU!REMENTS O. Work installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such other trades shall be changed to correct such condition without additional cost to the Owner and as directed by the ArchitectlEngineer. P. Equipment shall be installed with adequate space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment. Ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided without111oring other equipment which is to be installed or which is in place. Electricat Contractor shall verifo measurements. Discrepancies shall be brought to the Architect/Engineer's attention for interpretation. a. Determine temporary openings in the buildings that will be required for the admission of apparatus furnished under this DMsion, and notifr the Architect/Engineer accordingly. In the event of failure to give sufficient notice in time to arrange for these openings during construction, assume all costs of providing such openings thereafter. R. Location of electrical outlets, lighfing panels, cabinets, equipment, etc. is approximate and exact locations shall be determined at the project. S. Electrical Contractor shall referto contract documents for details, reflected ceiling plans, and large scale drawings. T. Equipment shall be installed with ample space allowed for its removal for repairs or changes. Ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided so that ottrei equipment, in place or to be installed, need not be moved at any time. U. Sufficient access for the installation of electrical equipment shall be determined prior to delivery. V. Compare all contract drawings and specifications to determine the intent ofthe two together. In case of any discrepancy between the drawings and specifications, the matter shall be referred to the Owner's Representative before any work is installed. The interpretation of the intent shall rest solely with the Owner's Representative, and his decision shall be considered final. W. Any changes of the electrical layout necessary to make the work conform to the entire facility as construction, fit the work of other trades or conform to the rules of the city and state and/or other regulating bodies @ublic Health, NFPA, etc.), shall be made without additional cost. X. Omission in the contract drawings and/or specifications of any items necessary for the proper completion or operation of the work outlined in this specification shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing same without additional cost. Y. WORK BY OT}IERS 1. Except as otherwise noted or specified, this Contractor shall not include the following apparatus which shall be provided under other contracts: Electric motors will be set on foundationby others, but shall be wired by this Contractor. 2. AII apparatus furnished by others to this Contractor shall be carefully protected, neatly connected, and shall be put in first class condition at time it is submitted for acceptance. The Contractor shall receive all equipment, sign for same and be responsible for its safety.3. This Contractor shall coordinate with controls Contractor to ensure that all starters and equipment are the proper type, have proper interlocks, holding coils, voltage, etc.. This Contractor wili check starter overloads with actual motor full load current nameplate rating.a. Motors with a marked service factor not less than 1 . 15 or marked with a temperature rise not over 40degrees C. shall besetatl25%o. b. All other motors shall be set at l l5%. 4. Temperature controls wiring and conduit will be fumished and installed under Heating Contract.5. Control wiring for all plumbing motors, hot water circulating pumps, domestic hot water recirculating pumps, sump pumps, sewage ejector, etc., will be installed and wired by the Electrical Contractor. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect conduit and wireway openings against the entrance of foreiga matter by means of plugs or caps. Cover fixtures, materials, equipment and devices or otherwise protect against damage fiom any cause, ARCON 15095 260010‐7BASIC ELECTR!CAL REQU:REMENTS 3.04 3.05 both before and after installation. Fixtures, materials, equipment, or condition or replaced, all at no additional cost to Owner. B. Equipment shall be inherently safe and moving parts shall be covered with guards. COOPERATION A. Where jurisdictional rules require the assistance of electrical mechanics in the moving and setting of electrically powered equipment, provide such assistance. B. Where work covered by this section connects to equipment furnished under other sections, veri! electrical work involved in the field and make proper connection to such equipment. FINAL COMPLETION A. Work shall be cleaned prior to the date of "substantial completion" as determined by the Owner's Representative. B. Clean equipment, restore all damaged materials, remove grease, oil, chemicals, paint spots and/or stains, etc., and generally leave the work in A-1 condition. C. Retouch and/or repaint all factory painted prime and/or finish coats where scratched or damaged. Wherever retouching will not be satisfactory, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the Owner's Representative had the option to require complete repainting until the desired appearance is obtained. D. Lamps, fixtures, lenses, reflectors, etc., shall be cleaned and not sooner than ten (10) days prior to date of substantial completion. E. Remove from site all tools, equipment, surplus materials, and rubbish pertaining to contract work and include all costs for such removal and disposition. All rubbish left will be removed by Owner and services for same shall be back-charged to Contractor against final payout on contract. DEMONSTRATION OF COMPLETED SYSTEMS A. Where not specifically described elsewhere within this electrical specification section, provide owner with a demonstraton of all complete systems as follows: 1 . Demonstrate to the Onwer's Representative, the essential features of all electrical systems specified.2. Show by start/stop operation, etc., the manner of control, resetting of protective devices and the replacement of fuses, etc. 3. Demonstrate area lighting and showthe location of panelboards, dimmers, time switches and setting, etc. 4. Demonstrate all required maintenance functions. 5. In addition to training specified in othe sections herein, Include a total of8 hours for demonstration of basic elechical systems. Hours and arrangement to be scheduled by Owner's Representative. TESTING AND INSPECTIONS A. Veri$ motors for proper rotation prior to operation. B. Test all motor controls for proper operations. C. Test all duplex receptacles for proper polarity and grounding. D. Measure, load, and record readings on all feeders, motors, transformers and panelboards, etc. Reconnect panelboard loads as may be necessary to obtain a reasonable balance ofloads on all phases. Variation shall not exceed 10% phase to phase. E. Provide three (3) typewritten copies ofthe recordings in bound booklets prior to requ€st for final payment. F. Demonstrate by tests, at the request of the Owner's Representative, the compliance of the installation with these specifications, the drawings, the National Electric Code, and the accepted standards of good workmanship. These tests shall include operation of lights and equipment, continuity of the Conduit system, grounding resistances, and insulation resistances on not more than ten (10) representative circuits and any other circuits for which a justifiable reason exists for such tests. All labor and testing equipment for the performance of these tests shall be fumished by the Contractor. 3.0` ARCON 15095 260010-8 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQU!REMENTS 3.08 GUARAI{TEE A. Where not specifically described elsewhere within this electrical specification section, the complete electrical system as indicated on the drawings and in these specifications shall be guaranteed by this Conhactor for one (l) year from date offinil acceptance bythe Architect against iefective material and workmanship. Defective workmanship and material developing during the guarantee period shall be repaired or replaced by this Contractor without cost to the Owner. B. Upon receipt of written notice fiom the Owner or Architect of failure of any part of the guaranteed materials or equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be repaired or replaced with new, by and at the expense of the Electrical Contractor. C. Make all service calls, replacements, repairs and adjusfnents during the guarantee period without cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 260010 ARCON 15095 260010-9 BAS:C ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SEti10N 2`0519 BIIILDING WIRE AND CABLE PARTl GENERAL l.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Single conductor building wlre. Bo Wire and cable fOr 600 volts and less. C. Wiring connectors. D.Electrical tape. E.Hcat shrink tubing. F. Wire puning lubricant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREIMENTS A, Section 260553‐Identiflcation for Electrical Systems: Identiflcation products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTヽ〔B3‐Standard Speciflcation for Son or Amealed Copper Wire;2013. B. ASThl B8‐Standard Speciflcation for COncentric‐Lay‐Standed Copper ConductOrs,Hard, Medium‐Hard,or So食 ;2011. C. ASTM B33‐Standard Speciflcation fOr Tin‐Coated Sott or Anncaled Copper Wire fOr Electrical Purposeち 2010 ccapprOved 2014).Dど胤憲鸞【Wi淵棚紹 :譜高翻:厩 :ぷ h“°nu面 1攣 sttn“d cop"r E. AS口ヽ4D3005‐Standard Speciflcation for Low‐Temperature Resistant Vinyl Ch10ridc Plastic Pressure¨Sensitive Electrical hsulatinL Tap%2010. F. AS口 Ⅵ D4388‐Standard Speciflcation for Nonmetallic Semi‐Conducting and Electrically lnsulating Rubber Tapes;2013. G.NECA l‐Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical ConsmctiOn;National Electrical COntractors Association;2010. H.31ECA 120‐Standard for lnstalling Anlored Cable(AC)and Mctal‐Clad Cable oMc);National Electrical Contractors Association;2012 oECANACNIA 102).L附胤∥il鑑 l淵慰蝋iW〕鵡 :盤麟継鵠ぽ概ぉ:リ J. NETA ATS‐Acceptance Testing Speciflcations for Electrical Power Equipment and systems; Intemational Electrical Testing Association;2013(ANS1/NETA ATS). K YttI:r鍔期lを常驚密常柵贅ltti:潔蹴瀾繁W:総温illHmAdoメd L. IAC 180‐11linois Administrative Code 180 M.UL 4‐Annored Cable;Current Edition,Including All Revisions. N. lJL 44‐Thennoset―Insulated Wires and Cables;Curent Edition,Including All Revisions. 0. lyL 83‐Themoplastic‐Insulated Wires and Cables;Current Edition,Including AH Revisions. P. UL 486A-486B‐Wirё Connectors;Curent Edition,Including All Revisions. Q. llL 486C‐Splicing V′ire Connectors;Current Edition,Including All Revisions. R. UL 486D‐Sealed Wire COmector Systems;Current Edition,Including All Revisions. S. lJL 510‐Polyvinyl Chloride,Polyethylene,and Rubber lnsulating Tape;Current EditiOn,Including AH Revlslons. ARCON 15095 260519…1BU:LD!NG VVIRE AND CABLE r.04 N)MINTSTRATTVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: l. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 3. Noti$ Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMIT'IALS A. Submit under provisions as described within the general requirements section. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. 1.06 QUALTTY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70. B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60 C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 DELMRY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's insfiuctions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than t4 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notiff Engineer and obtain direction before proceeding with work. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.OI CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted. D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted. E. Service entrance cable is not permitted. F. Armored cable is permitted only as follows: l. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used: a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to luminaires. 1) Maximum Length: 6 feet. 2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used: a. Where not approved for use by the authority having jurisdiction. b. Where exposed to damage. c. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations. G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted. 2.02 COI\'DUCTOR AND CABLE MANUF'ACTURERS A. Southwire Co. B. Triangle Wire and Cable. ARCON 15095 260519‐2BUILDING VVIRE AND CABLE 2.03 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with requirements ofNFPA 70. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. D. Comply with NEMA WC 70. E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with tll. 44. G. Conductor Material: l. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM 83, ASTM B8, or ASTM 8787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. H. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. a, Exceptions: 1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop. 3) 20 A,277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. I. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority havingjurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. 3. Color Code: a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: l) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray. b. zOgYflzO V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: l) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded: White. c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. d. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe. e. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink. f. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with eisting color code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2.04 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDINGWIRE A. Manufacturers: l. Copper Building Wire: a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com. b. Encore Wire Corporation: www,encorewire.com. c. SouthwireCompany: www.southwire.com. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. ConductorStranding: ARCON 15095 260519‐3BUILDiNG W:RE AND CABLE 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size l0 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. E. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/TI{WN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.a. Installed Exterior or Underground: Type K{HW-2. F. Conductor: Copper. G. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 2.05 ARMORED CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type AC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 4, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. B. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. C. Insulation: Type THHN. D. Grounding: Combination of interlocking annor and integral bonding wire. E. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape. 2.06 WIRINGCOI\NECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-4868 or tll, 486C as applicable. B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors. 2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors. C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are.required. D. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 y ,221 degree s F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. E. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw t)pe. F. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. 2,07 WIRINGACCESSORIES A. Electrical Tape: l. Manufacturers: a. 3M: www.3m.com. b. PlymouthRubberEuropa: www.plymouthrubber.com. 2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with AST.M D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment upto22l degrees F. 3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber @PR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service. 4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F. 5. Moisture Sealing Elechical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil. ARCON 15095 260519-4 BUILDING W:RE AND CABLE B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D. C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. D. Use mechanical compression for 6 AWG or larger or any connection made within any type of exterior junction box or device to include. Cover connector with insulating tape or heat shrinkable insulation equivalent to l50yo conductor insulation. E. Outdoor boxes (Including building mounted boxes used for outdoor devices) and undergroud connections of any type #12 to #6 AWG. l. Ideal Weatherproof wire connectors or equal. a. Silicon filled wire conneotors desigrred to meet UL 486D standards b. Size per manufacturer for number and wire sizes PART 3 EXECUTION 3.OI EXAMINATION A. Veri$ that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verifr that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. D. Veri! that raceway installation is complete and supported. E. Veriry that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. F. Veri$ that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. CircuitingRequirements: l. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4. Maintain separation of Class I, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, sigraling, and powerJimited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. 5. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance \ilith NFPA 70. 6. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted. 7. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neuhal/grounded conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit. 8. Provide oversized neutral/grounded conductors where indicated and as specified below. a. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders fed from K-rated transformers. b. Provide 200 percent rated neutral for feeders serving panelboards with 200 percent rated neutral bus. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. D. Install armored cable (Type AC) in accordance with NECA 120. E. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends ofconductors and cables to prevent infiltration ofmoisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. ARCON 15095 260519-5 BUILDING llVIRE AND CABLE F. G. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors ofthe same length and terminate in the same manner. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction. Provide independent support fiom building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles.2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. 1. Armored Cable (Type AC): t. Use listed fittings and anti-short, insulating bushings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prev€nt damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. Install conductors with a minimum of l2 inches of slack at each outlet. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. Group or otherwise identifr neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contacl surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacfurer's recommended torque settings. 6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacfurer's recommended tools and dies. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. 1 . Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or electrical fillertape, followed by outer covering ofvinyl insulating electrical tape.2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. 3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identiSing color code for ungrounded conductors at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods as required. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. 0. P. ARCON 15095 260519-6 BUILDINGヽ ″IRE AND CABLE a. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operafing system. R. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. S. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. l. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. 3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown. T. Use wiring methods indicated. U. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. V. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. W. Protect exposed cable from damage. X. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. Y. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. Z. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. AA. Identifr and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 260553 . Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. 3.04 FrELD QUALTTY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7 .3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. E. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2. END OF SECTION 260519 ARCON 15095 260519‐7BU:LDING VⅥRE AND CABLE SECTION 2`0529 CUTTING,PATCHING,SLEEVES,HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART l GENERAL l.01 GENERAL CONDIη 肛ONS A.Equipment shall not bc held in place by its own dead weight.Base anchor fattenerS Shall be prOvided in each case. B. AH cutting and patching ofnew and/or existing surfaces will be the responsibility ofthe Electrical Contractor.Surfaces宙 1l be restOrea to its onglnal condition and will be to the satisfactiOn Ofthe(btter and the Architect.Au patching Will be by tradesmen■ormally employed by each specialty and will be paid by the Elecmcal cOntractor. C. Contractor shan give the Architect complete inforlnation as to size ofopenings in■00rs,walis,ctc.,so that such openings may be prOⅥded as the building progresses. D.Ifopenmgs are omitted or in∞rrect through fallure to follow above insmctiOns,the cOntractor shall engage the Contractor for general flnishes consmctiOn tO cut and patch at his Own expense tO the satisfactlon Ofthe Architect. 1.02 SECT10N INCLUDES A. Support and amchnent components for equipmeは ,cOnduit,cable,boxes,and Other electrical wOrk。 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AS口 M4123/A123M‐Standard Specincation for Zinc oIOt‐Dip Calvanized)cOatings On lron and Steel PЮ ducts;2013. B.ASn4 A153/A153M‐Standard Specincation for Zinc Coating(Hot―Dip)On lrOn and steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASn4 B633‐Standard SPcciflcation for Electrodeposited Coatings ofZinc on lron and Steel;2013. D. νFヽク1‐4‐Metal Framing Standards Publication;ヽ letal Framing Manufacturers AssociatiOn;2004. E. ICC‐ES AC01‐Acceptance Criteria for Expans10n Anchors in MasOwy Elements;2009. F. ICC‐ES AC106‐Acceptance Criteria for PredHlled Fasteners(SCrew Anchors)in Masomy Elements; 2006 G. ICC‐ES AC193‐Acceptance Criteria for Nfechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;2010 H. ICC‐ES AC308‐Acceptance Criteria for Post‐Installed Adhesive Anchors in COncrete Elements;2009, I. NECA l‐Standard for Good Worlmlanship in EleclHcal Cons詢田ction;National Electrical COntractors Association;2010. ・ Wittrぶ蝋鷺∬ぶ言常鑑躍ズ1聰 i脇 :蹴瀾よ総1慧楠黒ill面 °n Adoメd l.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND AttACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Ceneral Rcquirements: 1. Provide all required hangers,suppOns,anchors,fasteners,flttings,accessOHes,and hardware as necessary for the complete installation ofelectrical work. 2. Provide products listed,classirled,and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,where applicable. 3 Where support and attachment componenttypes and sizes are notindicated,select in accOrdance 、nth manufactureris appHcation criteHa as required for the load tO be supported with a minilnum safety factor of_____.Include consideration for vibration,equipment Operation,and shOck 10ads where appHcable. 4.Do not use products for applications other than as perlni■ed by NFPA 70 and prOductlisung。 ARCON 15095AND SUPPORTS 260529‐l CUTT!NG,PATCH!NG,SLEEVES,HANGERS 5. Steel Components; Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed.a. ZinuPlated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM 8633. b. Galvanized Steel: Hot{ip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23lA123M or ASTM At53/At53M. B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported.1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otlerwise indicated. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. D. Metal Channel (Stru| Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly ofsupports.1. Comply with MFMA-4. E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. F. Anchors and Fasteners: l. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Expansive screw anchors, shields, or otler fastening items containing lead or other material that might loosen or melt under fire conditions shall not be used. No items shai rest on or depend for supportL suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath, plaster, splines, etc.). B. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. C. Sleeves for conduits shall be mild steel tube, galvanized inside and outside, equal to rigid conduit. D' Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized angles or channels supported with 3/8" threaded rods anchored to the building construction. Any nicessary Unistrut and/or steel to span construction members will be fumished and installed. E. Anchors and Fasteners: l. Do not use powder-actuated anchors, spring clips, or beam clamps.2. Concrete Strucfural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts.3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners. 4. concrete Surfaces: Use selGdrilling anchors or expansion anchors.5' Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners.6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. F. Formed Steel Channel: 1. Product: Unistnrt PART 3 EXECUTION 3.OT INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECAl. C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, orother systems. D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer, do not provide support fiom roofdeck. ARCON 15095 260529 - 2 CUTT|NG, PATCH|NG, SLEEVES, HANGERSAND SUPPORTS F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. G. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. I. Remove temporary supports. END OF SECTION 260529 ARCON 15095AND SUPPORTS 260529‐3 CUTT!NG:PATCHING,SLEEVES,HANGERS SECTION 260534 CONDUIT PART l GENERAL l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES A.Galvanized sted Hgid metal∞nduitは MC). B. Alulninum Hgid metal cOnduit fRMC). C.Intemediate metal∞nduit(IMC). D.PVC‐coated galvanized st∝l Hgid metal conduitlRMC). E. Fle対 ble metal condu丑側 c). F. Liquidtight ne対 ble metal conduit(LFNIC). G.ElectricJ metallic tubing cMT). H.Rigid p01yvinyl chloride eVC)conduit. I. Conduit flttings. J. Accessories. Ko Conduit,lttings and conduit bodies. 1.02 RELAttD REQUIREMENTS A. Section 033000‐Cast‐in‐Place Concrete:Concrete encasement ofoonduits. Bo Section 26052`‐Grounding and BOnding ibr Electrical Systems. C. Section 260529‐CUTⅧG,PATCHING,SLEEVES,HANGERS AND StIPPoRTS. D. Section 260553‐Identiflcation for Electrical Systems. E. Section 260537‐13oxes. F. Section 260553‐IdentiflcatiOn for Electrical Systems: Identi5cation products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI C80.1…AmeHcan National Standard for ElectHcal Rigid Steel Condutt eRSC);2005. Bo ANSI C80.3‐American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing cNfT光 2005. C.ANSI C80.5‐AmeHcan National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum COnduit(ERAC);2005, Do ANSI C80.6‐Ame五 can National Standard for ElectHcal htemediate Metal COnduit(EIMC光 2005. E. NECA l‐Standard for Good Worknanship in Electrical ConsmctiOn;National Electrical COntractOrs Association;2010. F.blECA 101‐Standard for lnstalling Steel Conduits(Rigid,IMC,EMT);National Electrical COntractOrs｀ Association;2013. G.■lECA 102‐Standard for lnstalling Aluininum Rigidヽ 4ctal Conduit;National Electrical COntractOrs Association;2004. H.NECA lH‐Standard for lnstalling Nonlnetallic Raceways aNC,ENT,LFNC);National Electrical Contractors Association;2003.L N誕鰤:烏認樹乱驚:結鳳:ぶぷ糧露1殿常i 麗1.MdttL TuЫ n3 J. NENIA RN l‐Polyvinyl―Chloridc(PVC)Extemally Coated Calvanized Rigid steel Conduit and lnterlnediate Metal Conduit;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;20o5. K. NEMA TC2‐Electrical P01yvinyl Chioridc(PVC)COnduit;National Electricalヽ lanufacturers Association;2013. Lo NENIA TC 3‐Polyvinyl Chloride eVc)Fittings fOr Use with Rigid PVC cO■duit and Tubing;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2015. ARCON 15095 260534‐1CONDUIT M.NFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Fire Protection Association;MOst Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and supplements. N.ULl‐Flexible Metal Conduit;Current Edition,Including All Revisions. 0.UL 6‐Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit‐Steel;Current Edition,Including All Revisions. P. llL 6A‐Electrical Rigid Mctal Conduit‐Aluminum,Red Brass,and Stainless stcel;Current Edition, Including A∥Revisions. Q. UL 360‐Liquid‐Tight Flexible Steel Conduit;Curent Edition,Including All Revisions. R. llL 514B‐Conduit,Tubing,and Cable Fittings;Cun℃nt Edition,Including All Revisions. S.llL 651‐Schedule 40,80,Type EB and A Rgid PVC COnduit and Fittings;cwTent Edition,Including All Revisions. T。 ■lL 797‐Electrical Metallic Tubing‐Steel;Curent Edition,Including A∥RevisiOns. U. UL 1242‐Electrical lntemediatc Metal ConduitoSteel;Current Edition,Including A∥RevisiOns. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.AH building宙 Hng shall be routed in approved metallic raceway(conduit)unless Otherwise specincally noted. B.All∞nduit shall be routed concealed(above lay‐in ceiling,宙 thin walls,below grade or slab,ctc.)within aH inished spaces unless otherwise noted. 1.05 SUBⅣEITTALS ´ Ao Subnlit under provisions as descHbed within the general requirements section. B.PЮ duct Data:PЮ vide for metallic conduit,ne対 ble metal conduit,liquidtight ne対 ble metal∞nduit, metanic tubing,nonmetallic conduit,fle対 ble nonllnetallic conduit,■ommetalHc tubing,ittings,and conduit bodies. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conforlln to requirements ofNFPA 70. B. Conforln to 11linois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC sectiOn 180.60 C. Products: Listed and classined by Underwriters Laboratories lnc.as suitable fOr purpose specifled and shown. 1.07 DELⅣERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Receive,inspect,handle,and store conduit and ittings in accordance with manufacmrers insmctiOns. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for darnage. C. Protect conduit,om corOsion and entrance ofdebris by storing above grade. Provide appropHate covenng. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated flttings for appHcations other than as pemitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted,use the conduit types indicated for the specined applications.Where more than one listed applic江 lon applies,∞mply宙th the mo"restric●ve requirementso WVhere conduit type for a particular application is not specifled,use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. C. Underground: 1. Under Slab on Crade: Use galvanized steel rigid inetal conduit. 2. ExteHor,Direct‐BuHed:Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 3. ExteHor,Embedded Within Concrete: Use galvanized steel Hgid metal cOnduit. ARCON 15095 260534‐2CONDUIT 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground. 5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends. 6. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit em€rg€s or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. D. Embedded Within Concrete: l. Within Slab on Grade (within structural slabs only where approved by Stmctural Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 2. Within Slab Above Ground (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing @MT). H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use electrical metallic tubing @MT). J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use intermediate metal conduit (IMC). K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. L. Conosive Locations Above Ground: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or aluminum rigid metal conduit. l. Corrosive locations include, but are not limited to: a. Cooling towers. b. Pools and pool equipment rooms M. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. l. Maximum Length: 6 feet. N. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: l. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated. 4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to: t. Transformers. b. Motors. c. Generators O. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit. 2.02 CONDUTTREQUTREMENTS A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they comply with specified requirements, are free fiom corrosion, and integrity is verified by puliing a mandrel through them. B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable forthe purpose intended. D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: l. Branch Circuits: l/2inch (16 mm) trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 3. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size. E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specifi ed. ARCON 15095 260534‐3CONDUIT 2.03 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A. B. Fittings: l. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with UL 5148. 2. Material: Use aluminum. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fiuings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.04 TNTERMEDTATE METAL CONDUIT (rMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying llrrrhlUl.- 1242. B. Fittings: l. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with UL 5148. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screwand compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.05 pvc-coATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGrD METAL CONDUTT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Robroy Industries; _: www.robroy.com. B- Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride @VC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. c. Exterior coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil. D. PVC-Coated Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Exterior coating: Polyvinyl chloride (pvc), minimum thickness of 40 mil. E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil. 2.06 FLEXTBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Manufacturers as described above. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with I-IL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with UL 5148. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. D. Description: Interlockedsteelconstruction. E. Fittings: NEMAFB 1. 2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Manufacturers as described above. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. C. Fittings: ARCON 15095 260534‐4CONDUIT l. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and Iisted and labeled as complying with UL 5148. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. D. Description: Interlocked steel construction with pVC jacket. E. Fittings: NEMAFB 1. 2.08 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers as described above. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and Iisted and labeled as complying with UL 797. C. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as complying with UL 5148. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) type. a. Do not use indentertype connectors and couplings. D. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB l; steel compression type . Steel set screw type shall be used for conduit runs withing block walls. 2.09 RIGrD pOLyVrNyL CHLORTDE (pVC) CONDUTT A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 65 l; Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C. B. Fittings: l. Manufacfurer: Same as manufacfurer of conduit to be connected.2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit. 2.IO ACCESSORIES A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil. B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed. D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force. E. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be installed. F. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the conduits to be installed. PART3 EXECUTION 3.OI EXAMINATION A. Veri$ that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. D. Veri$ roufing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. E. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. ARCON 15095 260534‐5CONDUIT 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102. D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101. E. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer. F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA l l r. G. Conduit Routing: l. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.2. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.3. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:a. Electrical rooms. b. Mechanical equipment rooms., c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling. 4. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed: a. Across roofs. b. Across top of parapet walls. c. Across building exterior surfaces. 5. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contoum where practical. 6. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.'1. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent ofthree 90 degree bends between pull points. 8. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 9. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 10. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.I1. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Heaters. b. Hot water piping. c. Flues. 12. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. H. Conduit Support: 1 . Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Sectio n 260529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support fiom ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tilei. I. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduitjoint compound on field-cut threads ofgalvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type ofconduit to another.4- Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. ARCON 15095 260534‐6CONDUIT 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with finished floor.7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. J. Penetrations: l. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. Seal interior ofconduits entering the building fiom underground at first accessible point to prevent enty ofmoisture and gases. Provide suitable modular seal where conduits penetate exterior wall below grade. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roofwarranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating ofpartitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 078400. Underground Installation: l. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 260553 along entire conduit length for service entrance where not concrete-encased. Embedment Within Structural Concrete Slabs (only where approved by Structural Engineer):l. Install conduits within middle one third of slab thickness. 2. Secure conduits to prevent floating or movement during pouring ofconcrete. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 033000 with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous (classified) locations, provide sealing fittings located as indicated or in accordance with NFPA 70. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or fiost. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas ofpotential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:l. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 260553. 9. 10. K. L. N. 0. P. Q. ARCON 15095 260534‐7CONDUIT 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized flnishes using zinc‐Hch paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs Ofcorrosion. B.Where coating ofPVC_coated galvanized steel rigid metal cOnduit(RMC)contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Correct deflciencies and replace damaged or defective conduits. 3.04 CLEANING A.Clean interior ofconduits to remove moisture and foreign matter. 3.05 1NTERFACE WITⅡ OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preseeⅣe Are resistance rating ofpartitiOns and other elements,using rnaterials and methods specifled within applicable sections ofbuilding speciflcation.3翌 i脚 1蠍織,電 m灘電ふ∬蹴:穏柵驚淵襦電話∥[i淵鶴∬arate Юonng END OF SECT10N 2`0534 ARCON 15095 260534‐8CONDUIT SECTION 260537 BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as juncfion and pull boxes. B. Cabinets and enclosures, includingjunction and pull boxes largerthan 100 cubic inches. I.O2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 260529 - currING, PATCHING, SLEEVES, HANGERS AND suppoRTs. B. Section 260534 - Conduit: 1. Conduit bodies and other fitfings. 2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points. C. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: 1. Wall plates. 2. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices. I.O3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA I - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NEMA FB 1 'Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable;National Elecnical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSIA{EMA FB l). D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSIA{EMA OS 1). E. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSIA{EMA OS 2). F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 20 14. G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Associatiory Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, IncludingAll Revisions. J. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 5l4A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATM REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: I . Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obskuctions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70. ARCON 15095 260537‐1BOXES 5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrrty. 7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted boxes where indicated. 8. NotiS Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. IAC 180 - Illinois Administrative Code 180 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions as described wiilrin the general requirements section. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for outlet and device boxes, cabinets and enclosures, and floor boxes. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground handhole enclosures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70. 1.07 DELMRY,STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 1g0.60 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BoxEs A. GeneralRequirements: l. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFpA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and pull Boxes:l. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. 3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used. 4. Use cast aluminum boxes where aluminum rigid metal conduit is used. 5. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete. 6. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. 7. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 8. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 9. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides ofwall. 10. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS l, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. I I . Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with ll1. 5 l4A; furnish with threaded hubs. ARCON 15095 260537‐2BOXES 12. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminai." rrher" required. 13. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes. 14. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 262726. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 50gA.2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type l, painted steel. b. Outdoorlocations: Type 3R, painted steel.3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: a. Provide screw-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 GENERAL A. In general, boxes shall be galvanized, pressed steel, have depth and shape best suited to the intended use, and contain knockouts of quantity and size equal to the conduit runs to be connected thereto. All boxes shall be securely fastened in place and shall provide sufficient support to the purpose intended. B. Outlet boxes for mounting fixtures shall be equipped with slipin or boltless fixture studs. Hickey studs will NOT be acceptable. Installation of the larger fixtures shall be made with hangers to support fixtures independently of outlet box. C. Outlet boxes not mounting fixtures and at which no connections are made shall be equipped with steel cover plates. Although no connections are made in such outlets, sufficient wire shall beprovided in each for making future connection. D. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized, octagon, 4" x l-112" deep without fixhrre stud, 2-llg" deep with fixture stud. E. Concrete boxes where used shall have a minimum of 1,, concrete cover. F. Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather-resistant (rain tight), having appropriate covers fitted with gaskets and fastened with screws. Boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds series CPS or Series V., as applicable. G. Switch outlet boxes for local light control switches, convenience outlets, telephone, etc., shall be galvanizsd, square 4" x l-l/2", with raised cover to fit flush with finish wall line. Multiple gang switch outlets shall consist of the required gang with raised covers. Where outlet boxes occurin exposed concrete block walls, boxes shall be installed in block cavity with a raised square edge tile cover of sufficient depth to extend out to face of block. Outlet boxes for special purposes shall be suitable for the purpose intended as herein specified and shown on the drawings. H. See drawings for additional information. The above is the minimum specificatibn unless otherwise noted on the drawings. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verifi that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Veri$ that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer,s instructions. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA I and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specihed in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. ARCON 15095 260537-3 80XES D. E. F. G. H. I. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted. Box Locations: l. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 262726.2. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. 3. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. 5. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated. 6. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation. ?. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced. a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect bottr boxes with listed putty pads. b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total aggregate area ofopenings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet ofwall area.8. Locatejunction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation ofconductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 260534. 9. Locatejunction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect: a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings. b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling. c. Electrical rooms. d. Mechanical equipment rooms. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section260529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority havingjurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system. Install boxes plumb and level. Flush-Mounted Boxes: l. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge ofbox or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than l/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface. 2. lnstall boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, grysum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than l/8 inch at the edge ofthe box. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor. J. K. L. M. ARCON 15095 260537‐4BOXES N. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 v. O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 078400. P. Close unused box openings. a. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or desigrated for future use. R Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526. S. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations. l. Adjust box locations up to l0 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreigrr material until ready for installation of conductors. END OF SECTION 260537 ARCON 15095 260537‐5BOXES SECr10N 260553 1DENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PARTl GENERAL l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES A. Identincation for Equipment l. Panelboards 2. Panelboard Schedules 3. E対 sting PanelbOard Schedules 4. Identiflcation labels l.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS l.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA ttr調躍[:橘鵬1謂梶ぶ証せズl聰露潔蹴瀾 lW:結靴llmmAdoptd B. IAC 180‐11linois Administrat市 e Code 180 1.04 ADMDヾ ISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. VeH取 inal designations for equipment,systems,and compOnents to be identined prior t。 fabrication ofidentiflcation products. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not concealitems to be identifled,in locations such as above suspended cellings,until identiication products have been instaned. 2. Do not install identiflcation pЮ ducts until flnal surface flnishes and painting are cOmplete. 1.05 SUBⅣ【ITTALS A. Subnlit under proⅥsiOns as described within the general requirements section. B. Product】Datal Provide catalog data for nalneplates,labels,and inarkers. C. Manufacturers lnstnctions: Indicate application conditions and limitations ofuse stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection,cxanlinatiOn,preparatiOn and installation ofproduct. 1.0` QUALIIV ASSURANCE A.Confonn to requirements ofNIFPA 70. B. Conforln tO 11linois Administrative Code 180 and an building Codes as listed in IAC section 180.60 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 1DENΠ FICATION REQUIREMENTS A.IdentiflcatiOn for Equipment l. Usc identiication nameplate or identincation label to identitt cach piece Ofelectl・ ical distribution and control equipment and associated sections,comparments,and compOnents. a. Panelboards: 1) USC identincation nalneplate to identi,panelbOard nmle. 2) Use COmputer Cenerated Directory to identi取 10ad(S)SeⅣed fOr panelbOards with a door.Identitt spares and spaces.助鷺器器∬棚糀躍キ:鞣導譜∬軍:胤 l翻 eplat"0∥耐取bЦ → PART 3 EXECUT10N 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to inanufacturers insttuctiOns. B. Degreasc and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. ARCON 15095 260553‐1 1DENT:FiCATloN FOR ELECttR:CALSYSTEMS 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install idenfification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustrnent, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: l. Surface-MountedEquipment: Enclosurefront. 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. 3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure fiont; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.4. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. 5. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 6. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point ofaccess. C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Install self'adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. 3.03 FrELD QUALTTY CONTROL A. Replace selladhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion. B. Panelidentification 1. Provide identification for each lighting and appliance panelboard with a computer generated directory accurately indicating rooms and/or equipment being serviced, sealed in plastic and attached to door interior, etc. Note: Each index shall be sequenced in accord with actual panel circuiting (i.e. left side - l, 3,5,7, etc., right side - 2, 4, 6, etc.). 2. Existing panelboards that require circuit modifications and/or additions shall have their circuit schedule completely replaced. All existing to remain circuits shall be traced to their load as required and indicated on the circuit schedule. END OF'SECTION 260553 ARCON 15095 260553-2 1DENT!F:CATloN FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECrION 2`2717 EQUIPMENT WIRING PARTl GENERAL l.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to cquipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 260519‐BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE. B. Section 260534‐Conduit. C. Section 260537‐Boxes, D. Section 26272`…WiHng Devices. E. Section 262818‐Enclosed Switches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NEヽい WDl‐General Color Requirements for WiHng De宙 ces;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;199962010). B. NEMA WD`‐Wiring Devices‐Dimensional Requirements;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2012.C凛鯛r磯蝋鷺肥留撫消籍ズll:二 :麗蹴棚鰍lW:ぶ認ilギ伍°n Adoメd D. IAC 180‐11linois Administrative Code 180. 1.04 ADⅣ【INISTRATⅣE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordination: 1. Obtain and re宙 ew shOp drawings,product data,manufacturers wiHng diagrams,and manufacturers insttuctions for equipment fumished under other sections. 2. Detennine connectiOn 10cations and requirements. B. Sequencing: 1. InstaH rough‐in ofelectrical connections before installation ofequipment is required. 2. Make clcctrical comections before required start…up ofequipment. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Subnlit under provisions as descHbed within the general requirements section. B. Product】)ata: Provide wlring device rnanufacturer's catalog inforlnation shOwing dirnensiOns, conflguratiOns,and consttuction. CI榊轟榊『憮器棚鍍 lttF肥絆棚織 ,躙ミ瑞血d l.06 QUALIη 日`ASSURANCEA.Confom to requirements ofNFPA 70. B. Confonn tO Ininois Administrative Code 180 and a∥building codes as listed in IAC section 1 80.60. C. PЮ ducts:Listed,classifled,and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 1.07 C00RDINATION A. Obtain and review shop drawings,pЮ duct data9 manuFacturers wiHng diagrams,and manufacturers instructions for equipment ttished under other sections. B. DeterIInine connection locations and requirements. C. Sequence rough‐in ofelectrical cOnnections to coordinate with installation ofequipment. D. Sequence electrical connections to c00rdinate with start‐up Ofequipment. ARCON 15095 262717‐1EQUIPMENT VⅥRING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Disconnect Smtches: As specifled in Section 26281 8 and in individual equipment sectiOns. B. Wiring Devices: As specifled in Section 262726. C. Flexible COnduit: As specifled in Section 260534. D. Wire and Cable: As speciied in Section 260519. E. Boxes: As specifled in Section 260537. PART 3 EXECU■ON 3.01 EXAMINA■ON A.VeH取 that equipment is ready for electrical connection,wiHng,and energizatiOn. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance wth equipment manufacturer's insmctiOns. B. Final comections to all motors shall be made宙 th ne対 ble steel conduit. Final cOnnections tO roof exhau"fans shall be made宙 th"Scahite"waterpЮ ofne対 uc conduit.Pro宙 de additional gЮ und宙 re to assure a perfect ground connection. C.Make conduit comections to equipment using ne対 ble condul.Use liquidtight nexible conduit with watertight comectors in dalnp or wet locations. D. Comect heat producing equipment using mre and cable with insulation suitable fOr temperatures encountered. E.PЮ 宙de receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attchnent plug。 F. ProⅥde cord and cap where fleld―supplied attachment plug is required. G. Instan suitable strain‐reliefclalnps and ttttings fbr cord connections at outlet bOxes and equipment connection boxes. H.Install discomea swlches,controners,control"誠 lons,and control devices to cOmplete cquipment wiring requirements. I. Install terminal blockjumpers to∞mplete equipment wiring requirements. J. Instan interconnecting cOnduit and vnring be際、en devices and equipmentto cOmplete equipment wiring requlrements. Ko Coolers and Freezersi Cut and seal conduit openings in■tezer and cooler walls,f100r,and ccilings. L.Seal Юofpenetrations as recommended by Юoing manufacturer. END OF SECTION 262717 ARCON 15095 262717‐2EQUIPMENT VViRING SECrION 262726 WIRING DEVICES PARTl GENERAL l.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C.Wall plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMEM「SAo Section 260537‐Boxes. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W‐C‐596‐Connector,Electrical,Power,General Speciflcation for;Federal speciicatiOn;Revision G,2001. B.FS WⅢS‐896‐Switches,Toggle(TOggiC and Lock),Flush‐mounted(General SpeciflcatiOn);Federal Speciflcation;Revision F,1999. C. NECA l‐Standard for Good Worlonanship in Electrical Constnction;National Electrical COntractors Association;2010. D.NEMA WDl‐General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;1999●2010). E.NENfA WD 6‐Wiring Device―Dimenslonal Speciflcations;National Electrical Manufacturers Association;2012. Fo NFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;National Fire Protection Association;MOst Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G.IAC 180¨11linois Administrative Code 180 H.UL 20‐General‐Use Snap Switches;Curent Edition,Including All Revisions. I. UL 498‐Attachnent Plugs and Receptacles;Curent Edition,Including All Revisions. J. llL 514D‐Cover Plates for Flush‐Mounted Wiring De宙 ces;Current Edition,Including All Rc宙 siOns. K. UL 943‐Ground‐Fault Circuit‐Interrupters;Current Edition,Including AH Revisions. 1.04 SUBⅣ【ITTALS A. Subnlit under provisions as described within the general requirements section. B. Product Data:Provide manufacturerヽ catalog infomation showing dimensions,c010rs,and conflguratiOns. 1.05 QUALIη 口`ASSURANCEA.Confom to requirements ofNFPA 70. B. Conforln to lninois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60 C.Manufacturer Qualiications:Company specializing m manufacturing the products specined in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANIIIFACTURERS A.Hubbell lncorporated;_____:―.hubbell‐wiHng.com. B.Leviton Manufactu」ng Company,In%二 :-leviton.com. C. Pass ttt Seymour,a brand ofLegrand North America,Inc;_…………_: ….legrand.us D.Source Limitationsi For each type of宙 ring device hmish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained ionl a single supplier. ARCON 15095 262726-1 lrVIRING DEVICES 2.02 WIRING DEVICE APPLICAT10NS A. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specifled weatherproofcOvers ibr receptacles installed outdoors or in damp Or wet 10cations. B. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 fect ofsinks. C. Provide GFCI Protection fOr receptacles installed in kitchens. D. Pro宙 de CFCI PЮ tectiOn for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. 2.03 ALL WIRING DEⅥCES A.PЮ 宙de products listed and classifed by Unde―lters Laborato」es lnc.as suitable fOr the purpose specifled症 d indicated. B. Finishes: 1. Wiring】)evices lnstalied in Finished SPaces: White with stainless steel wan plate unless Othemse indicated. 2. Wiring Devices lnstalled in Unflnished Spaces:ヽ Lite with galvanized steel wall plate unicss othe面 se indicated. 3. WiHng Devices lnstalled in Wet Or Damp Locations: White with specifled weatherpr00fcover unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 WALL SWITCHES A.WaH Switches‐Ceneral Requirements:AC only,quid oper"ng,general‐use snap switches宙 th dlveraHoy contacts,complyingvnth NEMA WD l and NEMA WD 6,and listed as cOmplying with llL 20 and where applicable,FS W‐S¨896;types as indicated On the drawlngs. 1, Wiring Provislons: Tenninal screws fOr side wiring and screw actuated binding clalnp fOr back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.3]織欄椰翼洋 ξlば盟昭輛昭鞘潔蹴 ξ蠍 :滞h l. Single pole a. HubbeH HBL1221 b. Leviton 1221‐2c. Pass and Seymour PS20AClI 2. Two pole a. Hubbell HBL 1222 b. Leviton 1222‐2c. Pass and Sey■our PS20AC21 3. Three way a. Hubben 1223 b. Levition 1223‐2c. Pass and Seymour PS20AC31 C.Pilol Light wall Switches:Industrial specincation grade,20A,120/277 V with red illulninated standard 熙甜LⅧ[織等胤:蹴響蹴fttFi鶉議席t辮選duC tte dtte肺ち D. Locking Wan Switches:Industrial speciflcation grade,20A,120/277 V with lever type keyed switch ¨m江 ∝鋤 d maintai“d co“att s宙 “ 詭 skw認』kettFepOl¨h」e thrOL“uble pole single throw,three way,or four way as indicated on tl 2.05 1NTERIOR RECEPTACLESA淵 h剛諦躙 ,精粘肥 W洲躙鰊鶉Q l. Wiring PrOvisions: Tcnninal screws fOr side wlring or screw actuated binding clalnp for back wiring with separate ground temninal screw. ARCON 15095 262726‐2WIRING DEV!CES 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. B. ConvenienceReceptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. a. Hubbell I{D.L 5362 b. Leviton 5362 c. Pass and Seymour 5362A C. GFCI Receptacles: l. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as ""*ifyi"g with UL gIS, class A. 2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 2OA, l21v,NEMA 5-20& rectangular decorator style. a. Hubbell GFR5352A b. Levition 7899 c. Pass and Seymour 2094 3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex , 20A, l25y ,NEMA5'20R' rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resisurn*t type complying with UL498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 2.06 WALL PLATES A. Wall Plates: Comply wirh LIL 514D. I . Configuration: one piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices.2. Size: Standard; _.3- screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. B. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 spec grade stainless steel. C. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws. D. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover andcorrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed] E. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover andcorrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type. F' Plates shall be held in place with screws finished to match the plates. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verifl'that outlet boxes are installed in proper locafions and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verit, that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. F. Verifu that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. G. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. H. Verifi that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. ARCON 15095 262726‐3lrV:RING DEViCES 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA I and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicatid. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA l, including mounting heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated. C. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. l. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor. b. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished flooror 6 inches above counter.2. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions. D. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 v. F. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. G. Connect wiring devices by rvrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 tum around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. H. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. I. For isolated ground receptacles, connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified branch circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal to outlet box or normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. J. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices. K. Install in accordance with NECA ,'Standard oflnstallation." L. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. M. Install wall switches with OFF position down. N. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers. O. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed orU"ibox"I or impropirly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. P. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. a. Install receptacles horizontal with grounding pole on right hand side. R. connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. S. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. T. lnstall galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes andjunction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets in unfinished spaces. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 to obtain mounting heights specified. 3.0s FrELD QUALTTY CONTROL A. See section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. ARCON 15095 262726‐4VV:RING DEViCES B. Inspect each wiHng device for dalnage and defects. C.Operate each wan switch,wan dimmer,and fan speed controller with circuit energized to veH,pЮ per operation. D.Operate cach wal switch宙 th circuit energlzed and veH,pЮ per Operation. E.Verl,that each receptacle device is energlzed. F. Test each receptacle to veri,operatiOn and pЮ per polarity. G.Test each GFCI receptacle for pЮ per trippmg operation ac∞rding to manufacturers insmctiOns. H. COFeCt WiHng deflciencies and replace dallnaged or defective wiring devices. 3.06 ADJUSl■卜IG A.A"ust deViCes and wall plates to be nush and level. 3.07 CLEANING A.Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt,paint or Other foreign material and restOre tO match OHginal factory inish. END OF SECTION 262726 ARCON 15095 262726‐5W!RING DEVICES SECrION 271005 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA‐INSIDE‐PLAM PARTl GENERAL l.01 SECT10N INCLUDES A.Communications system design requirements. Bo Communications pathways. C. Copper cable and tenninations. D. Conllnunications identiflcation. E.Data Cabling l.02 DEFINIη ΠONS A. BICSI: Bullding lndus,y Consulting Servicc lntemational. B.Cross‐Connect:A facility enabling the temination ofcable elements and their intercomectiOn Or cross‐connection. C. EME:Electromagnetic interference. D. DC: 】hsulation displacement connector. E.LadderF樋 k:A fabricated struchre consislng of神 o longitudinal side rails cOnnected by indi宙 dual iansverse members(rllngs). F. LAN: Local area ne●″ork. G. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which hoH20ntal cable or outlet cable terminates. H.RCDD:Registered Conununications Distribu●on Designer. I. U句日P: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.03 C00DRINAT10N OF WORK A. Contractor shan hmish and install an conduit/raceway as required for the smctured cabling distribution system.This includes an raceway explicitly shown on plans or generically rё quired fOr a complete, hnctional system. B.Contractor shaH mmish and install an specialty backboxes for de宙 ces as required fOr the ζmctured cabling distribution system.This hcludes all backboxes explicitly shown on plans Or generically required for a complete,mnctional system. C. Contractor shall mmish and install all branch circuits required for the smctured cabling distribution systenl as specifled. lrhis includes an cirpuits explicitly shown on plans or geneHcany required fOr a complete,負 nctional system. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.American National Standards lnstituteノ TeleCommunications lnduslり AssociatiOn/ElectЮ nic lndustries Alliancc(ANS1/TIA/EIA)ANS1/TIA/EIA‐568ⅢB.l Commercial Building TelecOnlmlmications Cabling Standards Part l:General Requirements,and all associated addenda. B. ICEA S‐90‐661‐Category 3,5,&5c lndividually Unshielded Twitted Pair lndOOr Cables(With Or Without An Overan Shield)For Usc in General Purposc and LAN CommunicatiOns Winng Systems Technical Requirements;Insulated Cable Engineers Association;2012.(ANS1/1cEA S‐90‐6`1) C.NIFPA 70‐National Electrical Code;Mbst Recent Edition Adopted by AuthoHty Having JurisdictiOn, Includhg All AppHcable Amendments and Supplements. D.IAC 180‐11linois Administrative Code 180. E. TIA‐492AAAB‐A‐Detall Speciflcation for 50‐um Core Diameter/125‐um Cladding Diameter Class la Graded―Index Multimode Optical Fibers;Telecommunications lndustt AssociatiOn;Rev A,2009・ ARCON 15095 DATA‐INSIDE‐PLANT 271005‐l STRUCttURED CABLING FOR VO:CE AND F. TU\492CNU\ - Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers; Telecommunications Industry Association; 1998 (R 2002). G. TIA-526-7 - OFSTP-7 - Measurement of OpticalPower Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant; Telecommunications Industry Association; 2002. H. TIA-526-14 - OFSTP-I4 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of lnstalled Multimode Fiber Cable Plant; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev B, 20 I 0. I. TIA-568-C.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev C, 2009 (with Addenda; 2012). J. TLA-568-C.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard -Part2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components; Telecommunications Industry Associatiory Rev C, 2009. K. TIA/EIA-568-B.3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, and Addendum I - Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 501125 um Optical Fiber Cables; Rev B, 2000; Addendum 1. L. TIA-569-C - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev C, 2012 (with Addend a; 2013). M. TLA-606-B - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infiastructure; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev B, 2012. N. TIA-607-B - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises; Telecommunications Industry Association; Rev B,2012 (with Addenda; 2013). O. ANSVJ-SD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earttring) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications; Rev A, 2002. P. ANSI[IA/EIA-526 Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Systems, and all associated addenda. a. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, and all associated addenda. R. International Standards Organization/International Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC) DIS I1801, January 6,1994 S. American National Standards Institute (ANSD X3T9.5 Requirements for UTP at 100 Mbps T. W 444 - Communications Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. U. UL 49'7 - Standard for Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communications Circuits; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. V. EIA-310-D - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Electronic Industries Association; 1992 W. UL 50, Cabinets and Boxes X. UL 1581 - Reference Standard for Elechical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Y. UL 1863 - Communications-Circuit Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Z. Work performed should additionally comply with and follow guidelines established in the latest edition/revision, as of the date of the Contract Documents, of the following publications: l. BICSI Telecommunications Dishibution Methods Manual (mMM) 2. BICSI Customer-Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP) 3. American National Standards InstituteA.Iational Electrical Contractors Association/Buitding Industry Consulting Service International (ANSINECA/BICSI) 568-2001 Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: ARCON 15095 271005‐2 STRUCTURED CABL:NG FOR VO:CE AND DATA‐lNSIDE‐PLANT 1 . Reviews of submittals are to establish general conformance to design intent and does not waive contract requirements. Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, mounting accessories, methods of construction, and compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Provide separate submittal product datalshop drawings for each fixture, device, and equipment type clearly indicating the type desigration per the Contract Documents and all pertinent options and accessories. Do not group similar fi,xture types together on a single cut sheet. Submittals which do not indicate option data where multiple selections exist will be retumed without being reviewed. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product. l. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 2. Installationmethods. C. Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements on isometric schematic diagram of network layout, showing cable routings, telecommunication closets, rack and enclosure layouts and locations, service entrance, and grounding, prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer ECDD).1. System Labeling Schedules: Elechonic copy ofproposed labeling schedules and identification plates, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. D. Evidence of qualifications for installer. E. Test Plan: Complete and detailed plan, with list of test equipment, procedures for inspection and testing. Submit along with product data. _ F. Field Test Reports. G. Project Record Documents: Prepared and approved by BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). l. Record actual locations of outlet boxes and distribution frames. 2. Show as-installed color coding, pair assignment, polarization, and cross-connect layout. 3. Identify distribution frames and equipment rooms by room number on contract drawings. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy ofproject record documents. r.06 QUALTTY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70. B. Conform to Illinois Administrative Code 180 and all building codes as listed in IAC section 180.60. C. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. Engage an experienced contractor who : 1. Shall be fully capable and experienced in the installation of the communications systems specified, and have a minimum of five (5) years experience on similar systems. 2. Has BICSI-trained and -certified, or equally qualified and certified, installers and technicians on staffand assign them to this project. If personnel of Contractor are not BICSI-trained and -certified, Contractor to submit with bid all necessary credentials and certificates of training for personnel stafffor evaluation and determination by CPS OTS Sr. Infrastructure Manager that said credentials and certificates are equal to BICSI standards. The project shall be staffed at all times by Installers and Technicians who, in the role of lead crafts persons, will be able to provide leadership and technical resources for the remaining crafts persons on the project. 3. Shall be certified by the manufacturing company(ies) in all aspects of installation and testing of the products described within the telecommunications systems specifications. Specifically, those manufacturer(s) whose components constitute a component of the structured cabling system(s) installed as part ofthe voice and data transport systems. Said certification is to be such that the Contractor is able to offer and fully comply with the requirements to provide Owner with an extended warranty as defined in "System Warranty and Application Assurance" Article of this Section. D. InstallerSupervision: ARCON 15095 DAttA‐:NSIDE―PLANT 271005‐3 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND I . The selected Contractor shall provide a Project Manager to act a single point of contact for all activities performed under this section. The Project Manager shall be a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). The RCDD shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in design and installation. The desigrer must have sufficient experience in this type project(s) as to be able to lend adequate technical support to the field forces during installation, during the warranty period and during any extended warranty periods or maintenance contracts. The Contractor must attach a resume of the responsible designer to the Contractor's response for evaluation. 2. The Project Manager, or designee thereof, shall be required to attend project meetings as required until proj ect closeout/signoff. 3. Should the Project Manager assigrred to this project change during the installation, the new project Manager assigned must meet all qualifications stated in this section, and must also submit a resume for review by the Owner. 4. If, in the opinion of the Owner, the Project Manager does not possess adequate qualifications to support the project, the Oumer reseryes the right to require the Contracto, to asrign a designer whom, in the Owner's opinion, possesses the necessary skills and experience required of this project. E. Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production ofthe required type of material or equipment for at least five years (unless specifically exempted by the Owner) and shall be the manufacturer's latest design with published properties. F. Source Limitations: Equipment and materials of the same general type shall be of the same manufacture throughout the project to provide uniform appearance, operation and maintenance. G. Equipment and materials shall be without blemish or defect. H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in City of Chicago Electrical Code, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. - I. Comply with NFPA 70 for abandoned cabling. I.O7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not deliver or install equipment fiames and ladder rack until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete. C. Receive, handle, and store communications system items and materials at the project site. Materials and items shall be placed so that they are protected from damage and deterioration. D. Stage materials in a secure area of the project site until installation. 1.08 F'IBER OPTIC CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Optical fiber backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between MDF and the IDF and Concentrator Enclosures in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate, mechanical terminations, and patch cords orjumpers used for backbone-to-equipment connections. 1.09 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the communications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the MDF and/or the IDF. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. B. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is determined by the communications area serving that link, as follows: ARCON 15095 DATA―INSiDE‐PLANT 271005‐4 STRUCTURED CABLiNG FOR VOICE AND 1. For horizontal cabling served from a Concentrator Enclosure, the maximum allowable length is 141 feet (43 meters). 2. For horizontal cabling served directly from the MDF <or from IDFP, the maximum allowable Iength is 295 feet (90 meters). a. The maximum allowable lengths do not include an allowance for patch cords I.1O PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-C.2, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. 1.I1 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranfies made by the Contractor under other requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a minimum one (l) year warranty for all parts and labor provided under this electrical specifications for all components not covered under the Special Warranty provisions of this Article. B. The Contractor shall guarantee at the time of the bid that all telecommunications equipment, cabling and components meet or exceed specifications. C. Special Warranty: Provide to Owner an Extended System and Application Assurance Warranty covering product and installation defects for all passive manufactured components of the structured cabling system(s) installed as part of the voice and data transport systems. Passive components are defined as those exhibiting no gain or contributing no energy. Warrant to Owner the following: l. The passive products that comprise the telecommunications structured cabling system will be free from manufacturing defects in material or workmanship under normal and proper use.2. All approved passive cabling products that comprise the structured cabling system exceed the specification standards and will conform to the performance specifications ofthe associated product data sheet in effect at the time t}re product is utilized. 3. The installation will meet, if not exceed, the requirements and the standards for cabling configurations specified in these standards. 4. The Special Warranty shall provided an application assurance guaranteeing structured cabling system shall be capable of running a minimum of Gigabit Ethernet (l000Mbs) in the horizontal channel, and l0-Gigabit Ethemet (10,000Mbs) in the backbone. 5. The Special Warranty shall be applicable to the original site of installation. Under the warranty, the manufacturer will either repair or replace the defective product itself at the manufacturer's cost, or the manufacturer will pay an authorized reseller for the cost to repair or replace any such defective product on behalf ofthe manufacturer. 6. Transfer manufacturer's warranties to the Owner in addition to tle General System Guarantee. Submit these warranties on each item in list form with shop drawings. Detail specific parts within equipment that are subject to separate conditional warranty. Warranty proprietary equipment and systems involved in this contract during the guarantee period. Final payment shall not relieve Contractor of these obligations. 7. Special Warranty shall be held by the product manufacturer(s). 8. Special Warranty Period: 25 years from date of acceptance. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.OI MANUFACTUR.ERS A. CATEGORY 6e UTP CABLE AND CONNECTING HARDWARE (Plenum) 1 . Category 6e UTP: Manufacturers of Cable: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: a. Hubbell Premise Wiring NEXTSPEED Category 6E cable b. Panduit GenSpeed 6500 Premium Category 6E cable c. BerkTek Lanmark 2000 Category 6E cable ARCON 15095 DATA‐INSIDE‐PLANT 271005‐5 STRUCTURED CABL:NG FOR VO!CE AND 2.02 2. Category 6e UTP: Manufacturers of Connecting Hardware and Patch Cords: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one ofthe following manufacturers:a. Hubbell Premise Wiring NEXTSPEED Category 6 Connectivity b. Panduit TX6 PLUS Category 6 Connectivity c. Ortronics Cladty 6 Series Connectivity d. Ortronics Inc., Clarity6 series components SYSTEM DESIGN A. Provide a complete permanent system of cabling and pathways for voice and data communications, including cables, conduits and wireways, pull wires, support sfiucfures, enclosures and cabinets, and outlets. l. Comply with TIA-568 (cabling) pnd TIA-569 (pathways), latest editions (commercial standards).2. Provide fixed cables and pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and T14-607 and are I-IL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified. 3. In this project, the term plenum is defined as retum air spaces above ceilings, inside ducts, under raised floors, and other air-handling spaces. B- Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Centrally located support structure for terminating horizontal cables that extend to telecommunications outlets, functioning as point of presence to external service provider.1. Locate main distribution fiame as indicated on the drawings.2. Capacity: As required to terminate all cables required by design criteria plus minimum 25 percent sPare space. C. Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDF): Support structures for terminating horizontal cables that extend to telecommunications outlets. l. Locate intermediate distribution frames as indicated on the drawings. D. Backbone Cabling: Cabling, pathways, and terminal hardware connecting intermediate distribution frames (IDF's) with main distribution frame (MDF), wired in star topology with main distribution frame at center hub of star. E. Cabling to Outlets: Specified horizontal cabling, wired in star topology to distribution frame located at center hub of star; also referred to as "links". PATHWAYS A. conduit: As specified in Section 260534; provide pull cords in ail conduit. B. Underground Service Entrance: Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit,'Schedule 40. COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS A. Data Cabling l. Horizontal Data a. Cable l) Copper Horizontal Cable: TIA/EIA-568 Category 6 solid conductor unshielded twisted pair (UTP), 24 AWG, 100 ohm; 4 individually rwisted pairs; covered with blue jacket and complying with all relevant parts of and addenda to latest edition of TIA/EIA-56g andL444. (a) Provide NFPA 70 type CMp plenum-rated cable.b. Jacks and Connectors l) RI-45, non-keyed, terminated with I l0-style insulation displacement connectors; high impact thermoplastic housing; complying with same standard as specified horizontal cable and UL 1863. (a) Color: Blue (1) color: Front face ofjack shall be colored. Use ofa color-coded icon insert on a neutral-colorjack shall not be acceptable. (b) Performance: 500 mating cycles.(c) Data Jacks: 4-pair, pre-wired to T5684 configuration, with color-coded indications for T568B configuration. 2.03 ARCON 15095 DATA‐lNS!DE‐PLANT 271005‐6 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOlcE AND B. Category 6 UTP: Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. a. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. b. Jack Modules shall comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2. 2. Patch Cord plug modules shall comply with ANSL/TIA-96s-A requirements. Patch cords shall be of same manufacfurer and consistent with components and performance level of cross-listed solutions indicated in this Article. 3. Color: Coordinate with UTP cable color per system application. 4. Quantity to be provided: a. Work Area: Provide one (l) 6-ft patch cord for each Category 6 UTP outlet installed per system application. b. Equipment End: l) Data Racks: (a) Provide ( I ) s-ft patch cord for one-half (fifty-percent) of the total number of Category 6 UTP outlets installed per system application. (b) Provide (1) 7-ft patch cord for one-half(fiffy-percent) ofthe total number of Category 6 UTP outlets installed per system application. 5. Delivery & Tum-over: Notify District Sr. Infrastructure Manager when patch cords have been delivered to project site. Deliver patch cords to site at least one week prior to substantial completion and store in locked, secure MDF room, or other locked, secure room as coordinated with Owner, until tum-over to district information technology manager personnel. Contractor is responsible for all patch cords until direct turn-over to district information technology manager. 2.05 IDENTIFICATIONPRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA-606. 2.06 CROSS-CONNECTION EQUTPMENT A. Patch Panels for Copper Cabling: Sized to fit EIA standard 19 inch wide equipment racks; 0.09 inch thick aluminum; cabling terminated on Type I l0 insulation displacement connectors; printed circuit board interface. 1. Jacks: Non-keyed RJ-45, suitable for and complying with same standard as cable to be terminated; maximum 48 ports per standard width panel. a. Category rating to match category ofspecifiedjack (see horizontal cabling). b. Jack color shall match the color ofspecified userjack (see horizontal cabling). 2. Capacity: Provide ports sufficient for cables to be terminated plus 25 percent spare. 3. Labels: Factory installed laminated plastic nameplates above each port, numbered consecutively; comply with TIA/EIA-606 using encoded identifiers. 4. Provide incoming cable strain reliefand routing guides on back ofpanel. 5. Provide full height (min 2U) patch cord organizers for each patch panel a. Minimum 2U height b. Panel material: 16 ga cold-rolled stee c. covermateiral: 16 ga cold-rolled steel d. Ring: 0.225" diamter steel road e. Black power coat f. Front and rear rings C. Front and rear cover 6. Patch Cords: Provide one patch cord for patch panel port. 2.07 LABELIDENTIFICATIONPRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation ARCON 15095 271005 -7 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA. INSIDE-PI.ANT 2. 3M 3. Panduit Corporation B. Cable/wire markers shall be self adhesive, self laminating mechanically printed with a clear protective laminating over wrap or protective heat-shrink tubing. C. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Receive, handle, and store communications system items and materials at the project site. Materials and items shall be placed so that they are protected fiom damage and deterioration. B. Stage materials in a secure area of the project site until installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. The drawings for work under telecommunications specification sections related to communication systems are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general arrangement of outlets, equipment, termination hardware, fixtures and other work included in the Conhact. B. Location of items required by the drawings or specifications not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only and exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and results shall be determined at the site and shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. C. Follow drawings in laying out worlg check drawings of other trades to verifr spaces in which work will be installed, and maintain maximum headroom and space conditions at all points. 1. Where headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Owner shall be notified before proceeding with installation. 2. Minor rerouting and changes in location shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.3. Coordinate the mounting heights of communications equipment and raceways to clear the opening heights of doors and the heights of equipment which needs to be removed and replaced.4. As necessary, adjust elevations of rack-mounted termination hardware and horizontal wire management panels so as to compensate for rack unit sizes of actual hardware used, as compared to hardware rack unit sizes depicted in Conhact Drawings. D. Perform all work with skilled mechanics of the particular trade involved in a neat and worlonanlike manner. E. Perform all work in cooperation and coordination with other hades and schedule. F. Fumish other trades advance information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves and openings needed for the work, routes for conduit, and also firrnish information and shop drawings necessary to permit hades affected to install their work properly and without delay. G. Where there is evidence that work of one trade will interfere with the work of other trades, all trades shall assist in working out space allocafions to make satisfactory adjustments and shall be prepared to submit and revise coordinated shop drawings. H. With the approval of the Owner and without additional cost to the Owner, make minor modifications in the work as required by structural interferences, by interferences with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. I. Work installed before coordinating with other trades so as to cause interference with the work of such other trades shall be changed to correct such condition without additional cost to the Owner and as directed by the Owner. J. Minor changes in the locations of outlets, fixtures and equipment shall be made prior to rough in at the direction of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. K. Contractor shall cooperate with other trades and coordinate work so that conflicts with other work are eliminated. ARCON 15095 DATA‐lNSIDE‐PLANT 271005‐8 STRUCTURED CABL!NG FOR V01CE AND L. M. Equipment shall be installed with adequate space allowed for removal, repair or changes to equipment. Ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to wiring shall be provided without moving other equipment which is to be installed or which is in place. Contractor shall veri! measurements. Discrepancies shall be brought to the Owner's attention for interpretation. Determine temporary openings in the buildings that will be required for the admission of apparatus furnished under this Division, and notifr the Owner accordingly. In the event of failure to give sufficient notice in time to alrange for these openings during construction, assume all costs of providing such openings thereafter. Location of communication outlets and raceway pathways are approximate and exact locations shall be determined on site. Contractor shall referto contract documents for details, reflected ceiling plans, and large scale drawings. Comply with Communication Service Provider requirements. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with TIA-607 and NFPA 70. INSTALLATION OF CABLES l. ComplywithNECA 1. 2. General Requirements for Cabling: a. Comply with TIAIEIA-568-C.2. b. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." c. Install 1lO-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. d. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. e. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. Do not over-cinch or crush cables.f. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. g. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than 4X cable diameter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. h. Hook and loop (Velcro)-style cable ties shall be used to bundle and secure exposed cables in MDF/IDF rooms. Use of plastic cable ties is not permitted. i. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.j. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. k. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions, and do not exceed manufacturer's recommended cable pull tension. I ) When installing in conduit, use only lubricant approved by cable manufacturer and do not chafe or damage outerjacket. l. Service Loops: Provide the following minimum extra length of cable, dressed and routed neatly: 1) At MDF/IDF frames: 60 inches, neatly installed in vertical wire manager or accommodated by additional routing around overhead ladder rack runway.2) At Surface Raceway Outlets - Copper: 12 inches, neatly installed in surface raceway channel. 3. UTP Cable Installation: a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2. b. Maintain pair twists as close as possible to point of termination, but do not untwist UTp cables more than 1/8 (.125) inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.c. Concentrator Enclosures: No cabling is to be routed down through the center area of the enclosure so as to inhibit the installation ofnetwork electronics. N. 0. P. Q. R. ARCON 15095 DAttA‐INS:DE―PLANT 271005‐9 STRUCTURED CABLINC FOR VOICE AND d' MDF/IDF: Install and route cabling on overhead ladder rack runway and within horizontal and vertical cable guides to terminating hardware. 4. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. 5. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: a. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3. b. Cables shall terminate with LC-type connectors secured in connecting hardware that is rack or enclosure mounted. c. Concentrator Enclosures: No cabling is to be routed down through the center area ofthe enclosure so as to inhibit the installation of network electronics.d. MDF/IDF: Install and route cabling on overhead ladder rack runway and within horizontal and vertical cable guides to terminating hardware. 6. Separation from EMI Sources: a. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical powir lines and equipment. b. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:l) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.2) Electrical Equipment Rating befween 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.c. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: 1) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than2 kVA: A minimum of 2-ll2 inches.2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.d. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic ftrceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: t) Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.2) Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.3) Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.e. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. f. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. S. INSTALLATION OF CABINET RACKS AND ENCLOSURES l. Comply withNECA l. 2. Install all communications hardware components in accordance with project specifications and plan, elevation, and layout information within Contract Drawings.3. The contractor shall coordinate the installation of communications cabinets, racks and enclosures with the installation of the communications pathways and cabling to eliminate any potential damage to cables, or any other installed communications components or equipment4- Backboards: Install plywood with "A" side outward and at elevation and wall location(s) as indicated in Contract Drawings. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-fr.. "o-..r.Cover fire-rating mark during painting. Remove cover afterwards, leaving mark exposed for subsequent inspection by authority having jurisdiction. 5. Communications Floor-mounted Racks: Assemble and install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Racks shall be assembled such that mounting rails are exactlyperpendicular to the base. a. Secure to floor utilizing lag bolts ormasonry anchors, and washers, appropriate to application and flooring condition. The use of a Tapcon, or equal, masonry screw with washer is not acceptable. Secure at all four locations ofrack base. ARCON 15095 DATA‐INSIDE‐PLANT 271005‐10 STRUCttURED CABLING FOR VOlcE AND b. Secure each communications floor-mounted rack to overhead ladderrack using eack-to-runway mounting plates, brackets, j-bolts, nuts/washers, etc., installed in compliance with manufacfurer's instructions and recommendations. 6. Wire management panels: Secure to communication relay racks in accordance with manufacfurer's instructions. 3.03 PATIIWAYEXAMINATION A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. 1. Veri$ proposed routes ofpathways. Check raceways, ladder racks, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Veri$ that cabling can be installed complying with EMI clearance requirements. 2. Prepare wall penetrations and veri$ that penetations of rated fire walls are made using products labeled for type of wall penetrated. 3. IdentiS plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight ofindividual types and sizes ofcables. Verify that load capacity ofcable support structures is adequate for each pathway. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PATI{WAYS A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at loast l8 inches below finish grade; encase in at least 3 inches thick concrete for at least 60 inches out from the building line. B. Install pathways with the following minimum clearances: l. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment, and unintemrptible power systems. 2. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards. 3. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures. 4. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes. C. Conduit, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260534: D. Conduit: l. Do not install more than 2 (two) 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run.2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed. 3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors except where specifically indicated to be exposed. a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and telecommunications rooms. b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as ifexposed to view. c. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below vapor retarder; seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit. E. Cable Routing l. All cabling to re routed within approved raceway or above lay-in ceiling. Cabling shall be hidden by ceiling or raceway in all locations of the building with the exception of IDF and MDF rooms or as otherwise noted on the drawings. a. Where cable tray is provided, route cabling within cable tray. b. Where conduit sleeve is provided, route cabling within conduit sleeve c. Above lay-in ceilings, where cable tray or conduit sleeves are not available: 1) Where raceway for cabling is not provided, Contractor shall run cabling through Erico Cablecat 2" J hooks. (a) J hooks shall be directly attached to building structure at a maximum of 4'-0,' center-to-center. ARCON 15095 271005‐1l STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VO:CE AND DATA‐lNSIDE‐PLANT (b) Additional J hooks will be added as necessary to limit the maximum cable catenary (cable sag) to 12" maximum. (c) Install tye-wraps around all J hooks upon completion of cable pulls. (d) J hook cable density shall not exceed 600/o of the maximum cable count suggested by manufacture. If necessary, provide additional level of J hooks for high cable density runs. (e) Contractor shall provide all mounting hardware (threaded rod, unistrut, etc.) Necessary to solidly mounted, complete cable raceway system. 3.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Utilize an approved firestop assembly to seal all cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Assembly must achieve the same smoke/fire-resistance rating as the floor or wall being penetrated. B. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." D. Comply with BICSI mMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.06 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. C. Coordinate location of communications grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. D. Bond metallic equipment to the communications grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. E. Bond each segment of ladder rack runway using bonding straps. Ladder rack connection fittings are not considered an acceptable bonding mechanism. Install bonding straps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. F. Bond metallic equipment to the communications grounding bus bar in MDF [or IDF], using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. l. Ground ladder rack system to communications grounding bus bar. 2. Ground each floor-mounted rack to communications grounding bus bar. Bonding to overhead ladder rack is not a permissible. 3. Ground each concentrator enclosure to communications grounding bus bar. At enclosure, terminate equipment grounding conductor to grounding bus bar located within enclosure. G. ESD Port Kit: Install ESD port kit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, on communications mounting elements as follows: L Floor-mounted racks: Mount a kit directly to both the front and the rear sides of the right verlical mounting rail of the center most rack in MDF [and the center most rack in IDF], at 48" above floor, using thread-forming screw and antioxidant compound. Coordinate exact location with Owner. 3.07 IDENTIFICATION A. All labeing standards will be determined in conjuction with the district information technology administrator. The district technology administrator shall have final approval on all labeling schemes. Labeling schemes applied without approval shall be replaced/modified to comply. B. Labeling shall minimually comply with EIA/TIA labeling standards. C. LABELING HIERARCHY l. When labeling communications cabling and pathways always begin the labeling scheme with the room or location ofgreater significance. 2. Consult with dishict Sr. Infrastructure Manager for clarifications regarding application of hierarchy table to the project. Hierarchy relationships that must be adhered to include, but are not limited to:a. Cabling and/or pathways betw'een the MDF and any IDFs must list the MDF first. b. Cabling and/or pathways between a concentrator enclosure and the work area must list the concentrator enclosures first. ARCON 15095 271005 - 12 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA. INSIDE-PI.ANT c. Cabling and/or pathways between an MDF or IDF and a wireless access point outlet must list the MDF or IDF first. 3. Labeling must be the same on both ends of the cable and/or pathway. 4. Labeling for all communications infrastructure elements shall be consistent across the installation. Coordinate with requirements for labels and identification defined in Contract Drawings. D. WIRE IDENTIFICATION 1. Cable/wire markers shall be installed within four (4) inches of each end of the cable, and where cable is accessible in junction or pull boxes. Information list on cable/wire marker shall include, but is not limited to: a. Cable and type b. Terminationhardware c. Terminationposition 2. Identification within Connector Fields in MDF, [IDFs,] and concentrator enclosures: Label each connector and each discrete unit ofcable-terminating and connecting hardware. E. WORKSTATIONLABELING 1. Adminishation at the work area / workstation will be carried out in proximity to the closest Distribution Frame (MDF, IDF). 2. The administration of the individual Data./Voice locations will reference the MDF or ID room location. 3. Administration of the individual jack locations will be used for local tracking or tracing of the patch panel termination points @ata,/Voice jacks back to the closest termination in the Distribution Frame). Typical numbering of the jack locations will begin with the termination point closest to the Distribution Frame and continuing in numerical series outward from that location. 3.OE CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit communications systems installation, including all pathway elements and supports necessary for same. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. Perform work so as to not impair structural stability of building construction and systems. B. Conduits passing through roofs or other surfaces exposed to weather shall be properly flashed as specified in roofing and waterproofing sections. This flashing work shall be part of this division of work. C. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new firestopping where existing firestopping has been disturbed during the course ofinstall. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics oftrades involved. 3.09 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section "Painting." 1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree ofdamage at each location. 2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.10 CLEANING A. On completion of installation inspect exposed finishes. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. Repair damaged finish(es), including chips, scratches, and abrasions. B. All equipment, hardware and finishes shall be cleaned prior to final acceptance. Unless otherwise indicated, clean shall mean free of dust, dirt, mud, debris, oil, grease, residues, and contamination. C. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Protect conduit and wireway ARCON 15095 271005 - 13 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA - INSIDE.PIANT openings against the entrance of foreign matter by means of plugs or caps. Cover fixtures, materials, equipment and devices fumished or installed under this section or otherwise protect against damage, both before and after installation. Hardware, materials, equipment, or devices damaged prior to final acceptance ofthe work shall be restored to their original condition or replaced. D. During the course of communications installation work, provide for on-going proper disposal of all debris, including but not limited to: equipment packaging and shipping materials, shipping pallets, empty cable reels/boxes, cable cuttings, etc. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site fiee fiom accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by its employees or work. Remove all crates, cartons, and other waste materials or trash from the working areas at the end of each working day. Flammable waste material must be removed from the working areas at the time of generation. All rubbish and debris, combustible or not, shall be discarded in covered metal containers daily and removed from the premises at least weekly and legally disposed of. 3.1T COMMISSIONING AND DEMONSTRATION A. INSPECTION l. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 . 2. Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, outleUconnectors, and patch panels for horizontal UTP cabling for Data.iWireless, Kronos and MMTV applications. 3. Visually confirm Category 5e marking of outlets, outlet/corurectors, termination blocks and patch panels for horizontal UTP cabling voice and 25-pair Category 5e backbone applications. 4. Visually confirm Category 3 marking of copper backbone UTP cables for indoor voice backbone applications. 5. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling ofall components. 6. Inspect cable terminations for color coded labels ofproper type. B. FIELD QUALITYCONTROLl. Perform tests and inspections. 2. Copper UTP Cable Tests: a. Copper UTP Test Instruments: 1) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-8.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for permanent link test configuration. 2) For horizontal UTP cable certification tests, use a Level III tester. b. Copper Backbone UTP Cable Tests: 1) Test copper backbone UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, polarity between conductors, and for insertion loss (attenuation). Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. c. UTP Performance Tests: 1) Test permanent link for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B. 1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: (a) Wire map. (b) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). (c) Insertion loss. (d) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. (e) Power sum near-end crosstalk @SNEXT) loss. (0 Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). (g) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). (h) Return loss. ARCON 15095 271005 - 14 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR VOICE AND DATA - INSIDE.PLANT (i) Propagation delay. 0) Delay skew. 2) Testing for Category 6 horizontal UTP must additionally report values for attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio (ACR), and power sum attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio (PSACR). 3) A star 1"*"1 passing shall not be considered acceptable. 3. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a. Optical Fiber Test Instruments: l) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b. Optical Time Domain Reflectometry Tests: After terminating optical fiber cables, one individual fiber from each backbone cable installed shall be tested using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR). Perform OTDR testing in accordance with manufacturer's recommended test procedures. Test to determine the installed length, continuity, and OTDR-based affenuation measurement. Provide test report identi$ing backbone cable identification and indicating corresponding values from tests. c. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests according to TIAIEIA-568-B. I and TIA/EIA-568-8.3. l) Multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in both directions according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. 2) Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/ETA-s68.B.I. 3) These readings must not be higher than the "Optimal Attenuation Loss (OAL)". The OAL will be calculated using the manufacturer's factory certified test results, (db/km) adjusted for the actual installed lengths (dBs) plus the manufacturer's best published attenuation losses for the connector on this project and/or splice installed on this project (0.25dB for Connectors and 0.l0dB for splices). 4) Link End-to-End Attenuation Test reports shall include: (a) Cable identification and Strand numbers (b) The OAL value for each link (c) The theoretical maximum attenuation value, per TIA/EIA-568-B.1, for each link (d) Tested values for attenuation 4. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table l0.l in BICSI mMM, or transferred from the insffument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. 5. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Correct failures and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new components and retest to demonstration compliance with requirements. 6. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 27IOO5 ARCON 15095 271005‐15 STRUCTURED CABLiNG FOR VO!CE AND DATA―lNSIDE‐PLANT ATTACHMENT C VILLAGE OF OAK BR00K FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVAT10N PROECT ATTACHMENT C LIST OF DMWIIGS SHEET NOSo SHEET TITLES Cover SheetGO。1Du..olition PlansAO。1Partial Floor Plan,Ceiling Plan and Finish Floor PlanAl.1 Schedule&DetailsA2.1 Electrical Plan&ScheduleEl.1 DATE LAST REVISED ゝ江ay 25,2018 ゝ江ay 25,2018 May 25,2018 May 25,2018 May 25,2018 ⅥLLAGE OF OAK BR00K FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVAT10N PROECT ATTACHMENT D SPECIAL PROJECT REOUIREMENTS 1. Contractor shall have five (5) years of experience which is comparable in type and scope to this project. 2. Work hours are 7:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday. Any deviation is subject to the approval of the Village representative. 3. The project will be done on consecutive work days, excluding weekends and holidays observed by the Village, until completed, delays only to inclement weather. 4. Contractor is required to obtain all necessary permits from the Village of Oak Brook, and schedule required inspections through Community Development. 5. The Conhactor shall supply to the Village, phone numbers where he/she can be reached after normal working hours. 6. The Contractor must submit all manufacturers' literature on all materials that will be used on this project, including M.S.D.S. (Material Safety Data Sheets) prior to any work beginning. 7. A storage location for supplies, ladders and scafflolding shall be mutually agreed upon between the Village and the contractor before any material is stored on site. The Contractor must deliver material with manufacturers labels intact and legible, store material on raised platforms and cover material with protective covering. 8. Before work is started, Contractor must deliver to the job site sufficient material to complete the project. g. If a dumpster is required, the location of the dumpster placement shall be mutually agreed upon between the Village and the contractor. 10. A11 ladders and scaffolding shall be maintained in prior working order during the course of this project and shall be secured at the end of each workday. 1 1. Contractor must provide barricades to ensure that falling debris will not rnjure anyone, and to prevent public access to the work area at all times. Yellow "CAUTION" tape will be placed below the immediate work areas of laborers and scaffolds to warn the public of people working overhead. ATTACHMENT D 12. At all times, Contractor must keep the work and storage areas in a clean, orderly, and a picked up manner, to prevent debris from blowing. Clean adjoining streets and immediate vicinity at the end of each work day. Sidewalks, windowsills, roofs and other work areas will be broom swept to remove all debris. Daily material and debris not placed into dumpster will be removed from the site. 13. Upon completion of the project the work area shall be cleaned. All debris and remaining material and supplies shall be removed from the jobsite, including the dumpster within 72 hours of completion. 14. Upon completion the Contractor shall supply a one year warranty covering material and workmanship; contractor shall submit sample warranty with bid. ⅥLLAGE OF OAK BR00K FIRE STATION 93 BUNK R00M RENOVAT10N PROJECT APPENDIX l PREVAILNG WAGES Prevai:ing Wage rates for DuPage County effective sept.1,2017 Trade Tit:● Reg:●n Type C:ass Base Wage ASBESTOS ABT‐GEN ALL ASBESTOS ABT―MEC ALL 301LERMAKER BRICK MASON CARPENTER CEMENT MASON CERAMIC TILE FNSHER ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL cOMMUNICAT10N TECH ALL ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL ELECTRIC PWR EQMT OP ALL ELECrRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL ELECTRIC PWR GRNDMAN ALL ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN ALL ELECTRIC PWR LINEMAN ALL ELECTRIC PVVR TRK DRV ALL ELECTRIC PVVR TRK DRV ALL ELECTR:CIAN ALL ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR ALL FENCE ERECTOR FENCE ERECrOR CLAZIER HT/FROSTINSULATOR IRON WORKER IRON WORKER LA30RER NEW ALL ALLEW ALL ALL BLD BLD BLD ALL ALL BLD BLD ALL HVVY ALL HVW ALL HVVY ALL HW BLD BLD ALL ALL BLD BLD ALL ALL ALL 15 152 15 152 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 152 152 15 1522 15 15 152 15 15 ■51:5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 152 152 15 1522 152222222222222222222222222 550 1235 1443 1340 1052 1404 1212 1415 1152 1465 4506 4245 5050 4733 4561 4120 M‐F OSA OSH H/W OT Pension Vacation Trainlng 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 493 416 0.C10 000 000 0:∞ 000 000 000 073 029 066 045 088 030 059 068 090 040 070 094 072 035 081 050 LATHER MACHINIST MARBLE FINISHERS MARBLE MASON MATERIAL TESTER l MATERIALS TESTER ll MILLWRIGHT OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENGINEER ORNAMNTLIRON WORKER ORNAMNTLIRON WORKER PAINTER PAINTER SiGNS PILEDRIVER PIPEFllTER PLASTERER PLUMBER ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALLEW ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 3120 3620 4635 5010 4880 4625 4450 5385 5110 5310 3800 4830 4775 4570 4430 4310 5130 4930 4675 4506 4418 3745 4635 4750 4275 4925 3120 3620 4835 5410 5410 5410 5410 5410 5410 5410 3800 5230 5230 5230 5230 5230 5230 5230 4925 4866 4618 4205 48135 5050 4531 5220 15 15 15 15 15 15 152222222 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 1522 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 152222222 ■515 15 15 15 15 15 1522 15 15 15 15 15 15 ■ 1045 1045 1465 1465 1179 18.80 1880 1880 1880 1880 1880 1880 1805 1880 1880 18.80 1880 1880 1880 1880 1390 1887 895 1552 1628 1232 1232 1887 1435 1435 1435 1435 1435 1435 1435 1360 1435 1435 1435 1435 1435 1435 1435 1979 2076 820 318 1887 1785 1571 1335 000 185 000 0C10 000 000 000 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 190 200 2t10 200 2∞ 200 200 200 000 000 000 0∞ 000 000 0∞ 000 063 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 130 075 070 ALL BLD ALL BLD ALL ALL ALL BLD l 3LD 2 BLD 3 BLD 4 BLD 5 BLD 6 BLD 7 FLT HWγ l HⅥ″ 2 HWY 3 HVVY 4 HⅢ 5 HVVY 6 HWY 7 ALL ALL ALL BLD ALL BLD BLD BLD222222222222222222222222 1522222 R00FER SHEEttMEttAL VVORKER SPRINKLER F1lTER STEEL ERECTOR SttEEL ERE⊂TOR STONE MASON TERRAZZO F!NISHER TERRAZZO MASON TILE MASON TRAFFiC SAFETY WRKR TRUCK DR:VER TRUCK DR!VER 丁RUCK DRIVER TRUCK DRIVER 丁UCKPOINttER Legend M‐F OT Unless othen輌 se noted′0丁 pav is required for any hour greaterthan 8 worked each dav′Mon through Fri. The number:isted is the multiple ofthe base wage. OSA Overtime pay required for every hour worked on Saturdays OSH Overtime pav required for every hour worked on Sundays and Ho∥days Hノ W Heakh/Werare benefit Explanations DUPAGE COUNIY :RON WORKERS AND FENCE ERECrOR(WEST)―WeSt Of Route 53. 丁he fo∥ovving list is considered as those days for wh:ch holidav rates of wages for work performed apply:New Years Day,Memorial Day′Fourth of July′Labor Dav′丁hanksgiving Day′Christmas Day and Veterans Dav in some classifications/counties. Genera∥y′any of these holidays which fall on a Sundav is celebrated on the fo∥owing Mondav. 丁his then makes work performed on that Monday pavable atthe appropriate overtime rate for ho∥day pav.Common practice in a given iocal may alter certain days of celebration. lfin doubt,please check with lDOL. ALL ALL ALLEW ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 1.5 1.5 1.522 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.522 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 9.08 10.65 12.25 13.45 10.52 10.45 10.65 10.65 日 8.10 8.10 8.10 8.10 8.10 10.45 12.14 14.10 11.55 19.59 20.76 16.68 12.76 14.15 日 7.62 9.76 9.76 9.76 9.76 15.04 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BLD BLD BLD ALL ALL BLD BLD BLD BLD HWY ALL l ALL 2 ALL 3 ALL 4 BLD EXPLANATION OF CLASSES ASBESTOS - GENERAL - removal of asbestos materiaUmold and hazardous materials from any place in a building, including mechanical systems where those mechanical systems are to be removed. This includes the removal of asbestos materials/mold and hazardous materials from ductwork or pipes in a building when the building is to be demolished at the time or at some close future date. ASBESTOS - MECHANICAL - removal of asbestos material from mechanical systems, such as pipes, ducts, and boilers, where the mechanical systems are to remain. TRAFFIC SAFETY - work associated with barricades, horses and drums used to reduce lane usage on highway wor( the installation and removal oftemporary lane markings, and the installation and removal oftemporary road signs. CERAMIC TILE FINISHER The grouting, cleaning, and polishing of all classes of tile, whether for interior or exterior purposes, all burned, glazed or unglazed products; all composition materials, granite tiles, warning detectable tiles, cement tiles, epory composite materials, pavers, glass, mosaics, fiberglass, and all substitute materials, for tile made in tile-like units; all mixtures in tile like form of cement, metals, and other materials that are for and intended for use as a finished floor surface, stair treads, promenade roofs, walks, walls, ceilings, swimming pools, and all other places where tile is to form a finished interior or exterior. The mixing of all setting mortars includinB but not limited to thin-set mortars, epoxies, wall mud, and any other sand and cement mixtures or adhesives when used in the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials. The handling and unloading of all sand, cement, lime, tile, fixtures, equipment, adhesives, or any other materials to be used in the preparation, installation, repair, or maintenance of tile and/or similar materials. Ceramic Tile Finishers shall fill all joints and voids regardless of method on all tile work, particularly and especially after installation of saidtilework. Application ofanyand all protective coverings to alltypes oftile installations including, but not be limited to, allsoap compounds, paper products, tapes, and all polyethylene coverings, plywood, masonite, cardboard, and any new type of products that may be used to protect tile installations, Blastrac equipment, and all floor scarifying equipment used in preparing floors to receive tile. The clean up and removal of all waste and materials. All demolition of existing tile floors and walls to be re-tiled. COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICIAN Low voltage installation, maintenance and removal of telecommunication facilities (voice, sound, data and video) including telephone and data inside wire, interconnect, terminal equipment, central offices, PABX, fiber optic cable and equipment, micro waves, V-sAT, bypass, CATV, WAN (wide area networks), LAN (local area network), and ISDN (integrated system digital network), pulling of wire in raceways, but not the installation of raceways. MARBLE FINISHER Loading and unloadinB trucks, distribution of all materials (all stone, sand, etc.l, stocking of floors with material, performing all rigging for heavy work, the handling of all material that may be needed for the installation of such materials, building of scaffolding, polishing if needed, patching, waxing of material if damaged, pointing up, caulking, grouting and cleaning of marble, holding water on diamond or Carborundum blade or saw for setters cutting, use of tub saw or any other saw needed for preparation of material, drilling of holes for wires that anchor material set by setters, mixing up of molding plaster for installation of material, mixing up thin set for the installation of material, mixing up of sand to cement for the installation of material and such other work as may be required in helping a Marble Setter in the handling of all material in the erection or installation of interior marble, slate, travertine, art marble, serpentine, alberene stone, blue stone, granite and other stones (meaning as to stone any foreign or domestic materials as are specified and used in building interiors and exteriors and customarily known as stone in the trade), carrara, sanionyx, vitrolite and similar opaque glass and the laying of all marble tile, terrazzo tile, slate tile and precast tile, steps, risers treads, base, or any other materials that may be used as substitutes for any of the aforementioned materials and which are used on interior and exterior which are installed in a similar manner. MATERIAL TESTER l: Hand coring and drilling for testing of materials; field inspection of uncured concrete and asphalt. MATERIAL TESTER ll: Field inspection of welds, structural steel, fireproofing, masonry soil, facade, reinforcing steeL formwork, cured concrete, and concrete and asphalt batch plants; adjusting proportions of bituminous mixtures OPERATING ENGINEER . BUILDING Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Spreader; Autograde; Backhoes with Caisson AttachmenU Batch Plant; Benoto (requires Two Engineers); Boiler and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs; Central Redi-Mix Plant; Combination Back Hoe Front End-loader Machine; Compressor and Throttle Vafue; Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Conveyor (Truck Mounted); Concrete Paver Over 27E cu. ft; Concrete Paver 27E cu. ft. and Under: Concrete Placer; Concrete Placing Boom; Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower; Cranes, All; Cranes, Hammerhead; Cranes, (GCl and similar Type); Creter Crane; Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derrick, All; Derricks, Traveling; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grouting Machines; Heavy Duty Self-Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader 2-1/4 yd. and over; Hoists, Elevators, outside type rack and pinion and similar machines; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Hoists, Two Tugger One Floori Hydraulic Backhoes; Hydraulic Boom Trucks; Hydro Vac (and similar equipment); Locomotives, All; Motor Patrol; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig, Post Hole Digger; Pre-Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type Pumps; Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Raised and Blind Hole Drill; Roto Mill Grinder; Scoops - Tractor Drawn; Slip-Form Paver; Straddle Buggies; Operation of Tie Back Machine; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom and Side Boom; Trenching Machines. Class 2. Boilers; Broom, All Power Propelled; BulldozeB; Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Forklift Trucks; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloaders under 2-t/4 yd.; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, lnside Elevators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machine; Hoists, Tugger Sintle Drum; Laser screed; Rock Drill (Self-Propelled); Rock Drill (Truck Mounted); Rollers, All; Steam Generators; Tractors, All; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Roller; Winch Trucks with "A" Frame. Class 3. Air Compressor; Combination Small Equipment Operator; 6enerators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, lnside Elevators (remodeling or renovation work); Hydraulic Power Units (Pile Driving, Extracting, and Drilling); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 3OO ft.); Low Boys; Pumps, Well Points; Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches,4 Small Electric Drill Winches. Class 4. Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders; Oilers; and Brick Forklift. Class 5. Assistant Craft Foreman. Class 5. Gradall. Class 7. Mechanics; Welders. OPERATING ENGINEERS . HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION Class 1. Asphalt Plant; Asphalt Heater and Planer Combination; Asphalt Heater Scarfire; Asphalt Spreader; AutoBrader/GOMACO or other similar type machines: ABG Paver; Backhoes with Caisson Attachmenu Ballast Regulatori Belt Loader; Caisson Rigs; Car Dumper; Central Redi-Mix Plant; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine, (1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.; Concrete Placer; Concrete Tube Float; Cranes, all attachments; Cranes, Tower Cranes of all types: Creter Crane: Spider Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc.; Derricks, All; Derrick Boats; Derricks, Traveling; Dredges; Elevators, Outside type Rack & Pinion and Similar Machines; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader, Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Form Grader, Pull Grader, Subgrader; Guard Rail Post Driver Truck Mounted; Hoists, One, Two and Three Drum; Heavy Duty Self-Propelled Transporter or Prime Mover; Hydraulic Backhoes; Backhoes with shear attachments up to 40'of boom reach; Lubrication Technician; Manipulators; Mucking Machine; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig; Pre-Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram; Rock Drill - Crawler or Skid Rig; Rock Drill - Truck Mounted; Rock/Track Tamper; Roto Mill Grinder; Slip-Form Paver; Snow Melters; Soil Test Drill Rig (Truck Mounted); Straddle Buggies; Hydraulic Telescoping Form (Tunnel); Operation of Tieback Machine; Tractor Drawn Belt l-oader; Tractor Drawn Belt loader (with attached pusher - two engineers); Tractor with Boom; Tractaire with Attachments; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machine; Trenching; Truck Mounted Concrete pump with Boom; Raised or Blind Hole Drills (Tunnel Shaft); Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines 5 ft. in diameter and over tunnel, etc; Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines under 5 ft. in diameter; Wheel Excavator; Widener (APSCO). Class 2. Batch Plant; Bituminous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Valve; Bulldozers; Car Loader Trailing Conveyors; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine (less than 1 cu. yd. Backhoe Bucket or over or with attachments); Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, Common Receiver (3); concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete Grinding Machine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 75 Series to and including 27 cu. ft.; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine, Burlap Machine, Belting Machine and Sealing Machine; Concrete Wheelsaw; Conveyor Muck Cars (Haglund or Similar Type); Drills, All; Finishing Machine - Concrete; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader; Hoist - Sewer Dragging Machine; Hydraulic Boom Trucks (All Attachments); Hydro-Blaster; Hydro Excavating (excluding hose work); Laser Screed; All Locomotives, Dinky; Off-Road Hauling Units (including articulating) Non Self-Loading Eiection Dump; Pump Cretes: Squeeze Cretes - Screw Type Pumps, Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Roller, Asphalt; Rotary Snow Plows; Rototiller, Seaman, etc., self-propelled; Self-Propelled Compactor; Spreader - chip - Stone, etc.; Scraper - Single/Twin Engine/Push and Pull; Scraper - Prime Mover in Tandem (Regardless of Size); Tractors pulling attachments, Sheeps Foot, Disc, Compactor, etc.; Tug Boats. Class 3. Boilers; Brooms, All Power Propelled; Cement Supply Tender; Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and Over); Conveyor, Portable; Farm-Type Tractors Used for Mowing, Seeding, etc.; Forklift Trucks; Grouting Machine; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, All Elevators; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Jeep Diggers; Low Boys; Pipe Jacking Machines; Post-Hole Digger; Power saw, Concrete Power Driven; Pug Mills; Rollers, otherthan Asphalt; Seed and Straw Blower;steam Generators; Stump Machine; Winch Truck with "A" Frame; Work Boats; Tamper-Form-Motor Driven. Class 4. Air Compressor; Combination - Small Equipment Operator; Directional Boring Machine; Generators; Heaters, Mechanical; Hydraulic Power Unit (Pile Driving, Extracting, or Drilling); Light Plants, All (1 through 5); Pumps, over 3" (1 to 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft.); Pumps, Well Points; Vacuum Trucks (excluding hose work); Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches,4 Small Electric DrillWinches. Class 5. SkidSteer loader (all); Brick Forklifts; Oilers. Class 6. Field Mechanics and Field Welders Class 7. Dowell Machine with Air Compresso4 Gradall and machines of like nature. OPERATING ENGINEER - FLOATING Diver. Diver Wet Tender, Diver Tender, ROV Pilot, ROV Tender TRUCK DRIVER . BUITDING, HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION Class 1. Two or three Axle Trucks. A-frame Truck when used for transportation purposes; Air Compressors and Welding Machines, including those pulled by cars, pick-up trucks and tractors; Ambulances; Batch Gate Lockers; Batch Hopperman; Car and Truck Washers; Carry-alls; Fork Lifts and Hoisters; Helpers; Mechanics Helpers and 6reasers; Oil Distributors 2-man operation; Pavement Breakers; Pole Trailer, up to 40 feet; Power Mower Tractors; Self-propelled Chip Spreader; Skipman; Slurry Trucks, 2-man operation; Slurry Truck Conveyor Operation, 2 or 3 man; Teamsters; Unskilled Dumpman; and Truck Drivers hauling warning lights, barricades, and portable toilets on the job site. Class 2. Four axle trucks; Dump Crets and Adgetors under 7 yards; Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnapulls or Turnatrailers when pulling other than selfJoading equipment or similar equipment under 16 cubic yards; Mixer Trucks under 7 yeards; Ready- mix Plant Hopper Operatot and Winch Trucks, 2 Axles. Class 3. Five axle truck; Dump Crets and Adgetors 7 yards and over; Dumpsters, Track Trucks, Euclids, Hug Bottom Dump Turnatrailers or turnapulls when pullint other than self-loading equipment or similar equipment over 16 cubic yards; Explosives and/or Fission Material Trucks; Mixer Trucks 7 yards or over; Mobile Cranes while in transit; Oil Distributors, 1-man operation; Pole Trailer, over 40 feet; Pole and Expandable Trailers hauling material over 50 feet long; Slurry truck, l-man operation; Winch trucks, 3 axles or more; Mechanic--Truck Welder and Truck Painter. Class 4. Six axle trucks; Dual-purpose vehicles, such as mounted crane trucks with hoist and accessories; Foreman; Master Mechanic; Self- loading equipment like P.B. and trucks with scoops on the front. TERRAZZO FINISHER The handling of sand, cement, marble chips, and all other materials that may be used by the Mosaic Terrazzo Mechanic, and the mixing, grinding, grouting, cleaning and sealing of all Marble, Mosaic, and Terrazzo work, floors, base, stairs, and wainscoting by hand or machine, and in addition, assisting and aiding Marble, Masonic, and Terrazzo Mechanics. other classifications of Work: For definitions of classifications not otherwise set out, the Department generally has on file such definitions which are available. lf a task to be performed is not subject to one of the classifications of pay set out, the Department will upon being contacted state which neighborinB county has such a classification and provide such rate, such rate being deemed to exist by reference in this document. lf no neighborinB county rate applies to the task, the Department shall undertake a special determination, such special determination being then deemed to have existed under this determination. lf a project requires these, or any classification not listed, please contact IDOL at 277 -782-7710 for wage rates or clarifications. TANDSCAPIN6 Landscaping work falls under the existing classifications for laborer, operating engineer and truck driver. The work performed by landscape plantsman and landsca pe laborer is covered by the existing classification of la borer. The work performed by landscape operators (regardless of equipment used or its size) is covered by the classifications ofoperating engineer. The work performed by landscape truck drivers (regardless of size of truck driven) is covered bythe classifications of truck driver. MATER:AL TESTER&MATER:AL TESTERノ lNSPECTOR:AND∥ Notwithstanding the difference in the ciassification title,the classincation entitled・ Material Tester l'linvolves the same job duties asthe classification entitled∥Material Tester/lnspector i∥ Likewise′the classification entitled∥Material Tester∥"involves the same job duties as the classification entitled "M ateria I Tester/lnspector ll". Unl D,川 dp,L60803 as P五 ndpJ(herem濡 :ん潔 Fキぶ l話器犠射 °r,)and 肝訛 ∬留￡鴛 :」籠響蹴 S her司目dd∥y and DepO釧 99mpany d Maヴ anり 399Z面 Ch VVay ――一―一‐一一――'lL 6019o ,organized and exヽ ung under the laws Ofthc state of APPENDⅨ 2 Bond#9277015 PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL NIIEN BY THESE PRESENTS: [inSen cOntractOr namc and addrcss herα]Unl D,Aに ip,IL o089o_ ________ Construction Solutions of lL., lnc. 12540 S. Holiday Drive Ьth Floori Schaumburg,lL 60196 tvt3ryEfl_ (hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road., Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee (hereinafter called the "Owner"), io the full and just sum of [insert full contract price here:] $71'72 for the payment of which sum of money well and truly to be made, the Contractor and the Surety bind themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents, said amount to include payment of actual costs and damages and for attorneys' fees, architectural fees, design fees, engineering fees, accounting fees, testing fees, consulting fees, administrative costs, court costs, interest and any other fees and expenses resulting from or incurred by reason of the Contractor's failure to promptly and faithfully perform its contract with the Owner, said contract being more fully described below, and to include attorneys' fees, court costs and administrative and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully enforcing performance of the obligation ofthe Surety underthis bond. WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written agreement dated [insert contract date here:] Otober Sth , 2011, with the Owncr titlcd [inSert cOntract titlc hcrc:] ff "r,r"r*n {rlli set fofth herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if the Contractor shall well, truly, and promptly perform all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of the Contractor under the contract, including but not limited to the Contractor's obligations under the Contrac! ( I ) to provide, perform, and complete at tho Work Site and in the manner specified in the Contract all necessary Worh labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data, and other means and items necessary for [insert general description of the Work here:] Provide and install all materials needed forthe renovation of the existing Fire Station and demolition of flooring t necessary in connection therewith [except as otherwise expressly provided in the Attachment _ of the Contrsct/;(3) to procure and furnish all bonds, certificates, and policies of insurance specified in the Contract; (4) to pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required of the Contractor by the Contrac(; and (6) to provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance with, and as required by and pursuant to, the Contract; all of which is herein referred to as the "Work," whether or not any of the Work enter into and become component parts of the improvement contemplated, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. APPENDIX 2 The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, modifications, alterationq omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances on the part of the Owner or the Contractor to the other in or to the terms of said Contrac[ in or to the schedules, plans, drawings, or specifications; in or to the method or manner of performance of the Work; in or to Owner-furnished facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or manner of payment therefore shall in any way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or any oftheir heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, or affect the obligations of the Surety on this bond, all notice of any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations, omissions, deletionq additions, extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults by the Contractor or of the Owner,s termination of the Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the foregoing paragraph, in no event shall the obligations of the Surety under this bond in the event of the Conhactor's default be greater than the obligations of the Contractor under the Contract in the absence of tho Contractor default. In the event of a default or defaults by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to take over and complete the Contract on 30 calendar days' written notice to the Surety, in which event the Suret-v shall pay the Owner all costs incurred by the Owner in taking over and completing the Contract. At its option, the Owner may instead request that the Surety take overand complete the Contrac! in which event the Surely shall take reasonable steps to proceed promptly with completion no later than 30 calendar days after the date on which the Owner notifies the Surety that the Owner wants the Surety to take over and complete the Contract. The Owner shall have no obligation to actually incur any expense or correct any deficient performance of the Contractor to be entitled to receive the proceeds of this bond. No right ofaction shall accrue on this bond to or for the use ofany person or corporation other than the Owner or the heirs, executors, adminishators, or successors of the Owner. Signed and sealed this Atte$t/ 5th day of Octoter By: Title: SURETY Fidelly 融っlres」an.21,2020 Bond#9277015 APPENDIX 3 LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: [i.:.! contractor-name and address here:] Construction Solutions of lL., lnc. 12540 S. Holiday Drive Unit D, Alsip, lL 60803 as principal (hereinafter called the..Contiactoi;,1 ana [.iltg.t surery name and address 1-r.r.t1 Fi9elity 3nd Deposit Company of Maryland 1299 Zurich Way Sth Floor, schaumburg, lL-ry]!q----.__-, organized and existing under the ta*s of tt " stut" or Maryland (hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto Village of Oak Brook, 1200 Oak Brook Road, Oak Brook, Illinois, as the obligee (hereinafter called the "Owner',), for the use and benefit of itself and of claimants as hereinafter defined (the "Claimants") in the full and just sum of [insert full contract price here:] $ ll J23 to be paid to the owner or the Claimants or the Owner's or the Claimant's assigns, to which payment well and truly to be made the Contractor and the Surety bind themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents, said amount to include attorney's fees, court costs, and administrative and other expenses necessarily paid or incurred in successfully enforcing performance of the obligation of the Surety under this bond. WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written agreement dated [insert contract date here:] October 5th ,2018 , with the Owner titled [insert contract title here:] Fire Station 93 Bunk Room Renovation Project ttho sh fr\iy set forth herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if the Contractor shall promptly puy or cause to be paid all sums of money that may be due to any Claimant with respect to the Contractor's obligations under the Contract: (1) to provide, perform, and complete at the Work Site and in the manner specified in the Contract all necessary Work, labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials, apparatus, machinery, tools, fuels, gas, electric, water, waste disposal, information, data and other means and items necessary for [insert general description of the Ⅵ′ork hcrc]ProMde and hstall a∥metends needed forthe renova∥on ofthe e対 slng ttre Sta∥on and demd面 on ofloo百 ng [except as otherwise expressly provided in Attachment A to the Contractf ; (3) to procure and furnish all Bonds and all certificates and policies of insurance specified in the Contract; (4) to pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes; (5) to do all other things required ofthe Contractor by the Contrict; and (6) to provide, performo and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner and in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract; all of which is herein referred to as the ".Work," whether or not any of said Work enter into and become component parts of the improvement contemplated, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. For purpose of this bond, a Claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to provide, perform, or complete any part of the Work. The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly and severally agree that every Claimant that has not had all just claims for the furnishing of any part of the Work paid in full, including without limitation all claims for amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, rentals of or service or repairs on machinery, equipment, and tools consumed or used in connection with the fumishing of any part of the APPENDIX 3 Worlq may sue on this bond for the use of that Claimant, may prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due that Claimant, and may have execution therein; provided, however, that the Owner shall not be liable forthe payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit. The provisions of 30 ELCS 550/l and 2 ofthe Illinois Compiled Statutes shall be deemed inserted herein, including the time limits within which notices of claim must be filed and actions brought under this bond. The Contractor and the Surety hereby jointly agree that the Owner may sue on this bond if the Owner is held liable to, or voluntarily agrees to pay, any Claimant directly, but nothing in this bond shall create any duty on the part of the Owner to pay any Claimant. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, modifications, alterations, omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances on the part of the Owner or the Contractor to the other in or to the terms of the Contract in or to the schedules, plans, drawings, or specifications; in or to the method or mElnner of performance of the Work; in or to Owner-furnished facilities, equipment, material, service, or site; or in or to the mode or manner of payment therefor shall in any way release the Contractor and the Surety or either or any of them, or any of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, or affect the obligations of the Surety on this bond, all notice of any and all of the foregoing changes, modifications, alterations, omissions, deletions, additions, extensions of time, or forbearances and notice of any and all defaults by the Contractor or ofthe Owner's termination of the Contractor being hereby waived by the Surety. Signed and sealed this Attest/Witness: lth auy of _os99g SURETY #34920193 v2 2018 CONTR By: ST亜 OFILUNOIS Commission ExPires jan. 21, By: Title: STATE OFILLINOIS COUNTY OF COOK I,Kristen Schmidt a Notav PubliC in and for the state and county aforesaid,do hereby certitt that Da宙 dJ.Roth of Orland Park, Ininois who is personaHy known to me, appeared before me this day and acknowledged that he signed, sealcd and del市 ered the foregoing instrument as his free voluntary act as Attomcv―in―Fact of Fidelitv and Deposit Companv of Marvland the free and voluntary act ofthe Fidelitv and Deposit Companv of Mawland forthe uses and purposes therein set forth. Given undcr my hand and Notarial Scalthis Sth day of Octobcr,A.D.2018 My coin■lission c、pil・ cs I)cccinbcl・ 29,2021 NOTARIA:´JtjRAT Notary Pub∥ci l ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COPIPANY COLONIAL AⅣEERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COⅣIPANY OF MARYLAND POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:Thatthc ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COヽ PANY,a corporation ofthe State ofNcw York,the COLONIAL ANIERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY,a corporation ofthc State of Maryland,and thc FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF NIARYLAND a corporation ofthe Statc of M町 land(herein c01lcct市 ely callcd thc∥Companies"),by ⅣIICHAEL BOND,Vicc President,in pursuancc of authority granted by Article V,Scction 8,ofthe By―Laws of said Companies,which arc set forlh on thc rcvcrse sidc hcrcof and are hereby ccrtiflcd to be in in forcc and effcct on the date hercol do hcreby nominatc, constitute,and appoint John J.NASO,JR。,April C.ARNOLD,David J.ROTH and Kristen SCHMIDT,a1l of Orland Park,mlinOis, EACH itstrue and iawil agcnt and Attomey‐in‐Fact,to make,cxecutc,seal and dcliveL for,and on its bchalf as surety,and as its act and deed: any and a∥bonds and undertakings,and the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuancc of thcse presents, shaH bcな binding upon said Companies,as hlly and alnply,to all intcnts and purposcs,aS if they had bccn duly cxccuted and acknowledged by thc rcgularly clccted ofFlcers of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COヽ 4PANY at its offlce in New York,Ncw York.,thc regularly electcd ofrlcers ofthe COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY atits ofrlccin owings Mins,Maryland.,and thc regularly clected offlccrs ofthc FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND atits offlce in Owings Mills,Mttyland,in thcir Owη proper pcrsons Thc said Vicc Prcsident docs hcrcby cettitt that the extract set fo■h on thc rcvcrse side hereofis a true copy of Article V,Section 8,of the By‐Laws ofsaid Companies,and is now in forcc IN Wlllヾ ESS WHEREOF,the said Vicc―President has hereuntO subscHbed his/her nalnes and afrlxcd thc cOrporate Scals of the said ZURICH AⅣIERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY,COLONIAL APIERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY,and FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COPIPANY OF DIEARYLAND,this 20th day of March,A.D.2018. ATTEST: ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANYFEDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND 町 Assistant Secretary Dawn E. Brown Vice President Michael Bond State of Maryland County of Baltimore On this 20th day of March, A.D. 2018, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, MICHAEL BOND, Vice President, and DAWN E. BROWN, Assistant Secretary, of the Companies, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and acknowledged the execution of same, and being by me duly swom, deposeth and saith, that he/she is the said officer ofthe Company aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals ofsaid Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and the signature as such officer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction ofthe said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above witten. '.'lllilill;""f;ii*r,r,,v'-' . n- t;i*n.:ti, 'rrrt I tilttr. Constance A. Dunn, Notary Public My Commission Expires: July 9, 2019 POA―F036‐3915A EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF THE COMPANIES "Article V, Section 8, Attorneys-in-Fact. The Chief Executive Officer, the President, or any Executive Vice President or Vice President may, by written instrument under the attested corporate seal, appoint attomeys-in-fact with authority to execute bonds, policies, recognizances, stipulations, undertakings, or other like instruments on behalf of the Company, and may authorize any officer or any such attomey-in-fact to aflix the corporate seal thereto; and may with or without cause modifu of revoke any such appointment or authority at any time." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Vice President of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, ANd thc FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPA}'IY OF MARYLAND, dO hETEbY CETtiS thAt thE foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certifr that Article V, Section 8, of the By-Laws of the Companies is still in force. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimite under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the ZURICH AMERICAN INSTIRANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the l5th day of December 1998. RESOLVED: "That the signature of the President or a Vice President and the attesting signature of a Secretary or an Assistant Secretary and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any Power of Attomey...Any such Power or any certificate thereof bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid and binding on the Company." This Powerof Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by autfrority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May, 1994, and the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPAI.ry OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the lOth day of May, 1990. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the comp.uly and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature ofany Vice-President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary ofthe Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. 面sW冗 ;γ 翌股躍 nわ SubscHbed my natnc md afflxcd■c coporac scds of血 csが d Compan颯 David McVicker,Vicc President BOND,PLEASE SUBMIT ALL REQUIREDTO REPORT A CLAIIⅥ WITH RECARD TO A SURETY INFORMATION TO: Zurich American lnsurance Co. Atm:Surety Claims 1299 Zurich Way Schaumburg,IL 60196-1056 :::|: l:ili::i:il:11:1!:.:ll :=I:.e`ll口壺B〕=:,,,〕9,, i11‐1:|:::::::::::::薔 :l:::: 菫 `1=it,=1188::愚 ||::1.331.8J 蓋編i編轟 :131..:ョ :。e3:o薔 35t`三 38BE:s.|:3ヨ隻尋:.112:EE=`=こと,t`をしOiり =,コ usu: ＼ Af,E6TIWdaE-d-La4& DdEd-aHh.r--".s EU,V(ROOfl IE rOvATrOtS *.*"o z!lffihdl6Lios- vfrrdd.d ril&lidld 6A GENERAL PLAN NOTES WAL TVPE SCI11●ULE E a'rrttrru-qt*e.iworoc@ffitffimEin6 tre*n.luacocmloruiF*cElmffier|M. SVMBOL uSth ハ #認露″・――…C・ HO… ■■蝋Pa…¨…。… X eaYffi z .*6ffi.. 6cm@M&frEX*EG-f-l--'omludffid*cru jl---ll 拙鼎gNEW WORK NOTES ――珈―饉け己‐● BUNK R00MRENOVArrO"S CASEWORK NOTES NOTES: TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER ANV:NC:DENTAL CCINTRACTCIR AS REQU:RED CASEWORK SCHIDULE 醐ギ…S虫 t腱 rVPE/●ISCRIP710"SiZE(lNC"暉 S, OPENINe ーい ●●Pth ○ ‐u1れ。 ○離鳥翻翔げ醐出間譜:ぶ記 1紺船EC・離∥〕囲謳ι“田¨m… 躙静翻戦が1出臀 2む ―t“umo囁 tν J■UNIS 4翻脚騨厭鵠認響°~・臨 ― 鴇幅回 DATA OtlTLET DETAILでヽ ▲轟・I BU∥κ R00M “"睛 "“ ●lb 町,3.2018 性 CmICAL pLA" El.1p礫 ○ =露常選電「 ‐RP…0 1 菖ダ徹鸞難=} ALL WORK SHOWN ON TH:S SHEET iS PART OF BASE B:D E l&1,, LlHlio , ! ffi sE e | *r& l. ---!s|. _l | -- lvnn *M r/ ftiE6